Manual Audio Analyzer R&S UPV Rohde & Schwarz User
User Manual: Rohde & Schwarz UPV User Manual
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 1008
Download | |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Manual Audio Analyzer DC to 250 kHz R&S UPV R&S UPV66 1146.2003.02 1146.2003.66 Printed in Germany Test and Measurement 1146.2084.32-09 I-1 The firmware of the instrument makes use of several valuable open source software packages. The most important of them are listed below together with their corresponding open source license. The verbatim license texts are provided in on the user documentation CD-ROM (included in delivery). Package Link License OpenSSL http://www.openssl.org OpenSSL/SSLeavy Net-SNMP http://www.net-snmp.org NetSnmp-5.0.8 Xitami http://www.xitami.com 2.5b6 PHP http://www.php.net PHP, Version 3 DOJO-AJAX http://www.dojotoolkit.org Academic Free License ResizableLib http://www.geocities.com/ppescher Artistic License BOOST Library http://www.boost.org Boost Software, v.1 zlib http://www.zlib.net zlib, v.1.2.3 http://xalan.apache.org/ http://xerces.apache.org/ Apache, Ver.2 ACE http://www.cs.wustl.edu/~schmidt/ACE.html ACE_TAO TAO (The ACE ORB) http://www.cs.wustl.edu/~schmidt/TAO.html ACE_TAO PC/SC-Lite http://www.linuxnet.com/ PCSCLite ONC/RPC http://www.plt.rwth-aachen.de/index.php?id=258 SUN Xalan Xerces The OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/). includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) and software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Rohde & Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing. R&S® is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners. 1146.2084.32-09 2 R&S UPV Tabbed Divider Overview Tabbed Divider Overview Data Sheet EC Certificate of Conformity Support Center Address List of R&S Representatives Chapter 1: Chapter 2: Chapter 3: Chapter 4: Chapter 5: Chapter 6: Chapter 7: Chapter 8: Chapter 9: Chapter 10: 1146.2084.32 Putting into Operation Getting Started Manual Operation Instrument Functions Remote Control - Basics Remote Control - Description of Commands Maintenance and Interfaces Index RE E-9 Grouped Safety Messages Make sure to read through and observe the following safety instructions! All plants and locations of the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies make every effort to keep the safety standard of our products up to date and to offer our customers the highest possible degree of safety. Our products and the auxiliary equipment required for them are designed and tested in accordance with the relevant safety standards. Compliance with these standards is continuously monitored by our quality assurance system. The product described here has been designed and tested in accordance with the EC Certificate of Conformity and has left the manufacturer’s plant in a condition fully complying with safety standards. To maintain this condition and to ensure safe operation, observe all instructions and warnings provided in this manual. If you have any questions regarding these safety instructions, the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies will be happy to answer them. Furthermore, it is your responsibility to use the product in an appropriate manner. This product is designed for use solely in industrial and laboratory environments or, if expressly permitted, also in the field and must not be used in any way that may cause personal injury or property damage. You are responsible if the product is used for an intention other than its designated purpose or in disregard of the manufacturer's instructions. The manufacturer shall assume no responsibility for such use of the product. The product is used for its designated purpose if it is used in accordance with its product documentation and within its performance limits (see data sheet, documentation, the following safety instructions). Using the product requires technical skills and a basic knowledge of English. It is therefore essential that only skilled and specialized staff or thoroughly trained personnel with the required skills be allowed to use the product. If personal safety gear is required for using Rohde & Schwarz products, this will be indicated at the appropriate place in the product documentation. Keep the basic safety instructions and the product documentation in a safe place and pass them on to the subsequent users. Symbols and safety labels Observe product documentation Weight indication for units >18 kg Supply voltage ON/OFF Danger of electric shock Standby indication Direct current (DC) Warning! Hot surface PE terminal Alternating current (AC) Ground Direct/alternating current (DC/AC) Ground terminal Attention! Electrostatic sensitive devices Device fully protected by double/reinforced insulation Observing the safety instructions will help prevent personal injury or damage of any kind caused by dangerous situations. Therefore, carefully read through and adhere to the following safety instructions before putting the product into operation. It is also absolutely essential to observe the additional safety instructions on personal safety that appear in relevant parts of the product documentation. In these safety instructions, the word "product" refers to all merchandise sold and distributed by the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies, including instruments, systems and all accessories. 1171.0000.42-04.00 Sheet 1 Grouped Safety Messages Tags and their meaning DANGER DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. WARNING WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. CAUTION CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. NOTICE NOTICE indicates a property damage message. In the product documentation, the word ATTENTION is used synonymously. These tags are in accordance with the standard definition for civil applications in the European Economic Area. Definitions that deviate from the standard definition may also exist in other economic areas or military applications. It is therefore essential to make sure that the tags described here are always used only in connection with the related product documentation and the related product. The use of tags in connection with unrelated products or documentation can result in misinterpretation and thus contribute to personal injury or material damage. Basic safety instructions 1. The product may be operated only under the operating conditions and in the positions specified by the manufacturer. Its ventilation must not be obstructed during operation. Unless otherwise specified, the following requirements apply to Rohde & Schwarz products: prescribed operating position is always with the housing floor facing down, IP protection 2X, pollution severity 2, overvoltage category 2, use only in enclosed spaces, max. operation altitude 2000 m above sea level, max. transport altitude 4500 m above sea level. A tolerance of ±10% shall apply to the nominal voltage and of ±5% to the nominal frequency. 2. Applicable local or national safety regulations and rules for the prevention of accidents must be observed in all work performed. The product may be opened only by authorized, specially trained personnel. Prior to performing any work on the product or opening the product, the product must be disconnected from the supply network. Any adjustments, replacements of parts, maintenance or repair must be carried out only by technical personnel authorized by 1171.0000.42-04.00 Rohde & Schwarz. Only original parts may be used for replacing parts relevant to safety (e.g. power switches, power transformers, fuses). A safety test must always be performed after parts relevant to safety have been replaced (visual inspection, PE conductor test, insulation resistance measurement, leakage current measurement, functional test). 3. As with all industrially manufactured goods, the use of substances that induce an allergic reaction (allergens, e.g. nickel) such as aluminum cannot be generally excluded. If you develop an allergic reaction (such as a skin rash, frequent sneezing, red eyes or respiratory difficulties), consult a physician immediately to determine the cause. 4. If products/components are mechanically and/or thermically processed in a manner that goes beyond their intended use, hazardous substances (heavy-metal dust such as lead, beryllium, nickel) may be released. For this reason, the product may only be disassembled, e.g. for disposal purposes, by specially trained personnel. Improper disassembly may be hazardous to your health. National waste disposal regulations must be observed. Sheet 2 Grouped Safety Messages 5. If handling the product yields hazardous substances or fuels that must be disposed of in a special way, e.g. coolants or engine oils that must be replenished regularly, the safety instructions of the manufacturer of the hazardous substances or fuels and the applicable regional waste disposal regulations must be observed. Also observe the relevant safety instructions in the product documentation. 6. Depending on the function, certain products such as RF radio equipment can produce an elevated level of electromagnetic radiation. Considering that unborn life requires increased protection, pregnant women should be protected by appropriate measures. Persons with pacemakers may also be endangered by electromagnetic radiation. The employer/operator is required to assess workplaces where there is a special risk of exposure to radiation and, if necessary, take measures to avert the danger. 7. Operating the products requires special training and intense concentration. Make certain that persons who use the products are physically, mentally and emotionally fit enough to handle operating the products; otherwise injuries or material damage may occur. It is the responsibility of the employer to select suitable personnel for operating the products. 8. Prior to switching on the product, it must be ensured that the nominal voltage setting on the product matches the nominal voltage of the AC supply network. If a different voltage is to be set, the power fuse of the product may have to be changed accordingly. 9. In the case of products of safety class I with movable power cord and connector, operation is permitted only on sockets with earthing contact and protective earth connection. 10. Intentionally breaking the protective earth connection either in the feed line or in the product itself is not permitted. Doing so can result in the danger of an electric shock from the product. If extension cords or connector strips are implemented, they must be checked on a regular basis to ensure that they are safe to use. 11. If the product has no power switch for disconnection from the AC supply, the plug 1171.0000.42-04.00 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. of the connecting cable is regarded as the disconnecting device. In such cases, it must be ensured that the power plug is easily reachable and accessible at all times (corresponding to the length of connecting cable, approx. 2 m). Functional or electronic switches are not suitable for providing disconnection from the AC supply. If products without power switches are integrated in racks or systems, a disconnecting device must be provided at the system level. Never use the product if the power cable is damaged. Check the power cable on a regular basis to ensure that it is in proper operating condition. By taking appropriate safety measures and carefully laying the power cable, ensure that the cable cannot be damaged and that no one can be hurt by e.g. tripping over the cable or suffering an electric shock. The product may be operated only from TN/TT supply networks fused with max. 16 A (higher fuse only after consulting with the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies). Do not insert the plug into sockets that are dusty or dirty. Insert the plug firmly and all the way into the socket. Otherwise, this can result in sparks, fire and/or injuries. Do not overload any sockets, extension cords or connector strips; doing so can cause fire or electric shocks. For measurements in circuits with voltages Vrms > 30 V, suitable measures (e.g. appropriate measuring equipment, fusing, current limiting, electrical separation, insulation) should be taken to avoid any hazards. Ensure that the connections with information technology equipment comply with IEC 950/EN 60950. Unless expressly permitted, never remove the cover or any part of the housing while the product is in operation. Doing so will expose circuits and components and can lead to injuries, fire or damage to the product. If a product is to be permanently installed, the connection between the PE terminal on site and the product's PE conductor must be made first before any other connection is made. The product may be installed and connected only by a license electrician. Sheet 3 Grouped Safety Messages 20. For permanently installed equipment without built-in fuses, circuit breakers or similar protective devices, the supply circuit must be fused in such a way that suitable protection is provided for users and products. 21. Do not insert any objects into the openings in the housing that are not designed for this purpose. Never pour any liquids onto or into the housing. This can cause short circuits inside the product and/or electric shocks, fire or injuries. 22. Use suitable overvoltage protection to ensure that no overvoltage (such as that caused by a thunderstorm) can reach the product. Otherwise the operating personnel will be endangered by electric shocks. 23. Rohde & Schwarz products are not protected against penetration of liquids, unless otherwise specified (see also safety instruction 1.). If this is not taken into account, there exists the danger of electric shock for the user or damage to the product, which can also lead to personal injury. 24. Never use the product under conditions in which condensation has formed or can form in or on the product, e.g. if the product was moved from a cold to a warm environment. 25. Do not close any slots or openings on the product, since they are necessary for ventilation and prevent the product from overheating. Do not place the product on soft surfaces such as sofas or rugs or inside a closed housing, unless this is well ventilated. 26. Do not place the product on heat-generating devices such as radiators or fan heaters. The temperature of the environment must not exceed the maximum temperature specified in the data sheet. 27. Batteries and storage batteries must not be exposed to high temperatures or fire. Keep batteries and storage batteries away from children. Do not short-circuit batteries and storage batteries. If batteries or storage batteries are improperly replaced, this can cause an explosion (warning: lithium cells). Replace the battery or storage battery only with the matching Rohde & Schwarz type (see spare parts list). Batteries and storage batteries must be recycled and kept separate from residual waste. Batteries and storage batteries that contain lead, mercury or cadmium are hazardous waste. Observe the 1171.0000.42-04.00 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. national regulations regarding waste disposal and recycling. Please be aware that in the event of a fire, toxic substances (gases, liquids etc.) that may be hazardous to your health may escape from the product. The product can be very heavy. Be careful when moving it to avoid back or other physical injuries. Do not place the product on surfaces, vehicles, cabinets or tables that for reasons of weight or stability are unsuitable for this purpose. Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when installing the product and fastening it to objects or structures (e.g. walls and shelves). Handles on the products are designed exclusively for personnel to hold or carry the product. It is therefore not permissible to use handles for fastening the product to or on means of transport such as cranes, fork lifts, wagons, etc. The user is responsible for securely fastening the products to or on the means of transport and for observing the safety regulations of the manufacturer of the means of transport. Noncompliance can result in personal injury or material damage. If you use the product in a vehicle, it is the sole responsibility of the driver to drive the vehicle safely. Adequately secure the product in the vehicle to prevent injuries or other damage in the event of an accident. Never use the product in a moving vehicle if doing so could distract the driver of the vehicle. The driver is always responsible for the safety of the vehicle. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for accidents or collisions. If a laser product (e.g. a CD/DVD drive) is integrated in a Rohde & Schwarz product, do not use any other settings or functions than those described in the product documentation. Otherwise this may be hazardous to your health, since the laser beam can cause irreversible damage to your eyes. Never try to take such products apart, and never look into the laser beam. Prior to cleaning, disconnect the product from the AC supply. Use a soft, non-linting cloth to clean the product. Never use chemical cleaning agents such as alcohol, acetone or diluent for cellulose lacquers. Sheet 4 EC Certificate of Conformity Certificate No.: 2004-25 This is to certify that: Equipment type Stock No. Designation UPV UPV66 1146.2003.02 1146.2003.66 Audio Analyzer UPV-B1 UPV-B2 UPV-B20 UPV-B3 UPV-B41 UPV-B48 UPV-U2 1146.5202.02 1146.4306.02 1402.2000.02 1146.4806.02 1146.5402.02 1402.2200.02 1402.1704.02 Low Distortion Generator Digital Audio I/O Digital Audio I/O 48 kHz Second Analog Generator I2S Interface 8 Channel Analog Inputs Additional BNC Phone Output complies with the provisions of the Directive of the Council of the European Union on the approximation of the laws of the Member States - relating to electrical equipment for use within defined voltage limits (2006/95/EC) - relating to electromagnetic compatibility (2004/108/EC) Conformity is proven by compliance with the following standards: EN61010-1 : 2001-12 EN55011 : 1998 + A1 : 1999 + A2 : 2002, Class B EN61326 : 1997 + A1 : 1998 + A2 : 2001 + A3 : 2003 For the assessment of electromagnetic compatibility, the limits of radio interference for Class B equipment as well as the immunity to interference for operation in industry have been used as a basis. Affixing the EC conformity mark as from 2004 ROHDE & SCHWARZ GmbH & Co. KG Mühldorfstr. 15, D-81671 München Munich, 2008-04-09 Central Quality Management MF-QZ / Radde 1146.2003.02 CE E-5 EC Certificate of Conformity Certificate No.: 2008-78 This is to certify that: Equipment type Stock No. Designation UPV-B42 1146.5802.02 Universal Serial Interface complies with the provisions of the Directive of the Council of the European Union on the approximation of the laws of the Member States - relating to electromagnetic compatibility (2004/108/EC) Conformity is proven by compliance with the following standards: EN 55011 : 1998 + A1 : 1999 + A2 : 2002, Klasse A EN 61326 : 1997 + A1 : 1998 + A2 : 2001 + A3 : 2003 For the assessment of electromagnetic compatibility, the limits of radio interference for Class A equipment as well as the immunity to interference for operation in industry () have been used as a basis. Affixing the EC conformity mark as from 2008 ROHDE & SCHWARZ GmbH & Co. KG Mühldorfstr. 15, D-81671 München Munich, 2008-09-16 Central Quality Management MF-QZ / Radde 1146.5802.02(2008-78) CE E-1 CERTIFICATE OF QUALITY CERTIFICAT DE QUALITÉ Sehr geehrter Kunde, Sie haben sich für den Kauf eines Rohde & Schwarz-Produktes entschieden. Hiermit erhalten Sie ein nach modernsten Fertigungsmethoden hergestelltes Produkt. Es wurde nach den Regeln unseres Managementsystems entwickelt, gefertigt und geprüft. Das Rohde & Schwarz Managementsystem ist zertifiziert nach: Dear Customer, you have decided to buy a Rohde & Schwarz product. You are thus assured of receiving a product that is manufactured using the most modern methods available. This product was developed, manufactured and tested in compliance with our quality management system standards. The Rohde & Schwarz quality management system is certified according to: Cher Client, vous avez choisi d‘acheter un produit Rohde & Schwarz. Vous disposez donc d‘un produit fabriqué d‘après les méthodes les plus avancées. Le développement, la fabrication et les tests respectent nos normes de gestion qualité. Le système de gestion qualité de Rohde & Schwarz a été homologué conformément aux normes: DIN EN ISO 9001:2000 DIN EN 9100:2003 DIN EN ISO 14001:2004 DIN EN ISO 9001:2000 DIN EN 9100:2003 DIN EN ISO 14001:2004 DIN EN ISO 9001:2000 DIN EN 9100:2003 DIN EN ISO 14001:2004 1171.0200.11-03.00 PD 5213.8744.99 = V 01.00 = May 2007 QUALITÄTSZERTIFIKAT Customer Support Technical support – where and when you need it For quick, expert help with any Rohde & Schwarz equipment, contact one of our Customer Support Centers. A team of highly qualified engineers provides telephone support and will work with you to find a solution to your query on any aspect of the operation, programming or applications of Rohde & Schwarz equipment. Up-to-date information and upgrades To keep your instrument up-to-date and to be informed about new application notes related to your instrument, please send an e-mail to the Customer Support Center stating your instrument and your wish. We will take care that you will get the right information. USA & Canada Monday to Friday (except US public holidays) 8:00 AM – 8:00 PM Eastern Standard Time (EST) Tel. from USA 888-test-rsa (888-837-8772) (opt 2) From outside USA +1 410 910 7800 (opt 2) Fax +1 410 910 7801 E-mail East Asia Rest of the World CustomerSupport@rohde-schwarz.com Monday to Friday (except Singaporean public holidays) 8:30 AM – 6:00 PM Singapore Time (SGT) Tel. Fax +65 6 513 0488 +65 6 846 1090 E-mail CustomerSupport@rohde-schwarz.com Monday to Friday 08:00 – 17:00 (except German public holidays) Central European Time (CET) Tel. from Europe +49 (0) 180 512 42 42* From outside Europe+49 89 4129 13776 Fax +49 (0) 89 41 29 637 78 E-mail CustomerSupport@rohde-schwarz.com * 0.14 €/Min within the German fixed-line telephone network, varying prices for the mobile telephone network and in different countries. 1171.0200.22-03.00 Customer Information Regarding Product Disposal The German Electrical and Electronic Equipment (ElektroG) Act is an implementation of the following EC directives: • • 2002/96/EC on waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE) and 2002/95/EC on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment (RoHS). Product labeling in accordance with EN 50419 Once the lifetime of a product has ended, this product must not be disposed of in the standard domestic refuse. Even disposal via the municipal collection points for waste electrical and electronic equipment is not permitted. Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG has developed a disposal concept for the environmental-friendly disposal or recycling of waste material and fully assumes its obligation as a producer to take back and dispose of electrical and electronic waste in accordance with the ElektroG Act. Please contact your local service representative to dispose of the product. 1171.0200.52-01.01 12 Address List Headquarters, Plants and Subsidiaries Locations Worldwide Headquarters Please refer to our homepage: www.rohde-schwarz.com ◆ Sales Locations ◆ Service Locations ◆ National Websites ROHDE&SCHWARZ GmbH & Co. KG Mühldorfstraße 15 · D-81671 München P.O.Box 80 14 69 · D-81614 München Phone +49 (89) 41 29-0 Fax +49 (89) 41 29-121 64 info.rs@rohde-schwarz.com Plants ROHDE&SCHWARZ Messgerätebau GmbH Riedbachstraße 58 · D-87700 Memmingen P.O.Box 16 52 · D-87686 Memmingen Phone +49 (83 31) 1 08-0 +49 (83 31) 1 08-1124 info.rsmb@rohde-schwarz.com ROHDE&SCHWARZ GmbH & Co. KG Werk Teisnach Kaikenrieder Straße 27 · D-94244 Teisnach P.O.Box 11 49 · D-94240 Teisnach Phone +49 (99 23) 8 50-0 Fax +49 (99 23) 8 50-174 info.rsdts@rohde-schwarz.com ROHDE&SCHWARZ závod Vimperk, s.r.o. Location Spidrova 49 CZ-38501 Vimperk ROHDE&SCHWARZ GmbH & Co. KG Dienstleistungszentrum Köln Graf-Zeppelin-Straße 18 · D-51147 Köln P.O.Box 98 02 60 · D-51130 Köln Phone +420 (388) 45 21 09 Fax +420 (388) 45 21 13 Phone +49 (22 03) 49-0 Fax +49 (22 03) 49 51-229 info.rsdc@rohde-schwarz.com service.rsdc@rohde-schwarz.com Subsidiaries R&S BICK Mobilfunk GmbH Fritz-Hahne-Str. 7 · D-31848 Bad Münder P.O.Box 20 02 · D-31844 Bad Münder Phone +49 (50 42) 9 98-0 Fax +49 (50 42) 9 98-105 info.bick@rohde-schwarz.com ROHDE&SCHWARZ FTK GmbH Wendenschloßstraße 168, Haus 28 D-12557 Berlin Phone +49 (30) 658 91-122 Fax +49 (30) 655 50-221 info.ftk@rohde-schwarz.com ROHDE&SCHWARZ SIT GmbH Am Studio 3 D-12489 Berlin Phone +49 (30) 658 84-0 Fax +49 (30) 658 84-183 info.sit@rohde-schwarz.com R&S Systems GmbH Graf-Zeppelin-Straße 18 D-51147 Köln GEDIS GmbH Sophienblatt 100 D-24114 Kiel HAMEG Instruments GmbH Industriestraße 6 D-63533 Mainhausen 1171.0200.42-02.00 Phone +49 (22 03) 49-5 23 25 Fax +49 (22 03) 49-5 23 36 info.rssys@rohde-schwarz.com Phone +49 (431) 600 51-0 Fax +49 (431) 600 51-11 sales@gedis-online.de Phone +49 (61 82) 800-0 Fax +49 (61 82) 800-100 info@hameg.de 12 R&S UPV Contents – Putting into Operation Contents - Chapter 1 "Putting into Operation" 1 Putting into Operation ...............................................................................................................1.1 Description of the Front Panel ........................................................................................................1.2 1 Screen with softkeys ...................................................................................................1.2 2 Navigation keys ...........................................................................................................1.4 3 Data entry keys ...........................................................................................................1.4 4 CONTROL panel .........................................................................................................1.5 5 VARIATION panel .......................................................................................................1.7 6 USB connectors ..........................................................................................................1.7 7 CD/DVD Combo drive .................................................................................................1.8 8 Ground socket .............................................................................................................1.8 9 Headphone connector .................................................................................................1.8 10 SETUP panel...............................................................................................................1.8 11 HELP key ....................................................................................................................1.8 12 WINDOW panel...........................................................................................................1.8 13 Analog audio interfaces...............................................................................................1.9 14 WINBAR key ...............................................................................................................1.9 15 Digital audio interfaces ..............................................................................................1.10 16 Power switch .............................................................................................................1.10 17 Status LEDs ..............................................................................................................1.11 Description of the Rear Panel .......................................................................................................1.13 1 LAN connection .........................................................................................................1.13 2 USB device connector...............................................................................................1.13 3 RS-232-C interface....................................................................................................1.13 4 Printer interface .........................................................................................................1.13 5 Connector for external monitor..................................................................................1.13 6 USB connectors ........................................................................................................1.13 7 BNC audio monitoring output ....................................................................................1.14 8 Trigger connectors ....................................................................................................1.14 9 Analog auxiliary output ..............................................................................................1.14 10 Digital synchronization and expansion interfaces .....................................................1.14 11 IEC/IEEE-bus connector ...........................................................................................1.15 12 AC supply voltage connector ....................................................................................1.15 13 Slots for expansion plug-ins ......................................................................................1.15 14 I²S interface ...............................................................................................................1.15 15 LAN Reset button ......................................................................................................1.16 1146.2078.62 I-1.1 E-5 Contents – Putting into Operation R&S UPV Putting into Operation ...................................................................................................................1.17 Unpacking the Instrument ......................................................................................................1.17 Setting up the Instrument or Installing it in a 19" Rack ..........................................................1.17 Safety Instructions..................................................................................................................1.18 General Safety Instructions .........................................................................................1.18 Protection Against Electrostatic Discharge..................................................................1.18 Setting Up the Instrument ............................................................................................1.19 Cleaning the Outside and Storing................................................................................1.19 EMC Safety Precautions..............................................................................................1.19 Connecting the R&S UPV to the AC Supply ..........................................................................1.20 Setting the AC Supply Voltage...............................................................................................1.20 Switching On ..........................................................................................................................1.21 Start Screen and Booting of the R&S UPV ............................................................................1.21 Restarting the R&S UPV ........................................................................................................1.22 Switching off the instrument ...................................................................................................1.22 Function Check...............................................................................................................................1.24 Presets.............................................................................................................................................1.24 Windows XP ....................................................................................................................................1.25 Connecting an External Keyboard................................................................................................1.26 Connecting a Mouse ......................................................................................................................1.26 Connecting an External Monitor ...................................................................................................1.27 Changing the screen resolution ...................................................................................................1.28 FMR6......................................................................................................................................1.28 FMR7......................................................................................................................................1.32 Installing Options ...........................................................................................................................1.35 Connecting the R&S UPV to a Network (LAN).............................................................................1.36 Connection to the Network.....................................................................................................1.36 Configuring the R&S UPV for Network Operation .......................................................1.37 Preparations.................................................................................................................1.38 Entering the IP Address ...............................................................................................1.38 Querying the Computer Name.....................................................................................1.40 Accessing Directories in the Network ..........................................................................1.41 Configuration via LXI (R&S UPV66) ......................................................................................1.42 LXI classes and LXI functionality .................................................................................1.42 LXI LAN Indicator.........................................................................................................1.43 LXI Default State of Network Settings .........................................................................1.44 LXI Browser Interface ..................................................................................................1.44 IP Configuration ...........................................................................................................1.46 Advanced LAN Configuration ......................................................................................1.47 Ping Client....................................................................................................................1.48 1146.2078.62 I-1.2 E-5 R&S UPV Contents – Putting into Operation Configuration for Manual Remote Operation .........................................................................1.49 Activating the Remote Desktop Connection program at the R&S UPV.......................1.50 Starting manual remote operation at the external computer .......................................1.51 Firmware update.............................................................................................................................1.53 Windows XP Recovery and Backup .............................................................................................1.54 Call the Windows XP Recovery and Backup Partition Menu.................................................1.54 Backup Current System Partition ...........................................................................................1.55 Recover Selected Version of System Partition ......................................................................1.56 Recover Factory Default ........................................................................................................1.57 Delete Backups ......................................................................................................................1.58 1146.2078.62 I-1.3 E-5 Front Panel R&S UPV Front Panel R&S UPV Fig. 1-1 Front Panel R&S UPV 1146.2078.62 I-1.4 E-5 R&S UPV Contents – Putting into Operation Front Panel R&S UPV66 Fig. 1-1a Front Panel R&S UPV66 1146.2078.62 I-1.5 E-5 R&S UPV Description of the Front Panel 1 Putting into Operation The R&S UPV audio analyzer is available in two models. The R&S UPV standard model and the R&S UPV66, which is specially designed for use in systems. The R&S UPV66 has no display, no front panel control elements, and no CD/DVD drive. Apart from the omission of front-panel operation, the R&S UPV66 model has largely the same functions as the standard model. This manual therefore describes both instruments in parallel, and any differences are indicated at the appropriate points in the text. Chapter 1, "Putting into Operation", describes the control elements and connectors at the front and rear of the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV and shows how the instrument is put into operation. It also describes the connection of peripherals such as printer, keyboard, mouse and monitor. Specifications for the interfaces can be found in the data sheet. The introduction in Chapter 2, "Getting Started", provides an overview of the functions and operating concept of the audio analyzer. Detailed operating instructions and an overview of the menus are provided in Chapter 3, "Manual Operation". The CD-ROM contains the entire manual complete with the other chapters in printable PDF format: The individual menus and functions of the instrument including the associated remote-control commands are explained in detail in the reference section (Chapter 4). Basic information on remote control of the instrument is provided in Chapters 5 to 7, "Remote Control - Fundamentals" and "Remote Control Commands". A detailed description of the instrument interfaces can be found in Chapter 8, "Maintenance and Interfaces". Chapter 9, "Error Messages" contains an overview of the possible error messages output by the instrument. Notes: The audio analyzer has the WindowsXP operating system. No special knowledge of the operating system used is required for operation of the instrument. It is, however, assumed that users possess basic PC knowledge, such as what files and directories etc are or how data is transferred using the Windows Explorer. This information is therefore not specified in detail here. The R&S UPV audio analyzer can be fully operated via the control elements on the front panel. It is, however, also possible to operate the instrument using an external keyboard and mouse. Operation follows the same basic rules which apply to other Windows programs in use today. It is also assumed that users are familiar with these basic rules. This information is therefore not specified in detail here. The R&S UPV66 model has no front panel keypad, no display, and no CD/DVD drive; however, as is the case with the R&S UPV standard model, it can be operated by means of a keyboard or mouse, provided that an external screen is connected. 1146.2078.62 1.1 E-5 Description of the Front Panel R&S UPV Description of the Front Panel This section provides an overview of the control elements and connectors on the front of the R&S UPV. 1 Screen with softkeys Fig. 1-2 Screen 1146.2078.62 1.2 E-5 R&S UPV Description of the Front Panel The large screen shows all of the important settings and states of the audio analyzer in a clearly organized display. 5 displays ("screens") are provided to ensure clearer organization of the many possible panels and display windows. The display is divided into the following sections: - menu bar - operating and display area - WINBAR with softkey labels - softkeys The menu bar - contains a row of pull-down menus which can be used to, for example, load instrument settings, select panels and screens or call up help functions. - The menu bar appears when the MENU key is pressed or the mouse pointer is moved to the left of the screen. It otherwise remains hidden in order to save space. In the operating and display area - the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV is operated using numerous panels which can be selected by the user - the measurement results are displayed numerically and/or graphically in the format selected by the user The softkey bar/WINBAR at the bottom of the screen has two functions: - In normal operating mode, the softkey bar containing the functions available in the selection windows of the panels is visible; the softkeys permit rapid selection without needing to use the mouse. - When the WINBAR key is pressed, the WINBAR containing the names of all opened panels / graphical windows is displayed in place of the softkey bar. Pressing the associated softkey puts the focus on the corresponding panel / graphical window, i.e. it becomes active. At the same time, the system returns to normal operating mode (see above). - It is possible to toggle between the softkey bar and WINBAR at any time by pressing the WINBAR key. The function of the softkeys - 1146.2078.62 corresponds to the label on the softkey bar and WINBAR. The softkeys can also be operated using the function keys on the external keyboard or by clicking the associated button. 1.3 E-5 Description of the Front Panel 2 R&S UPV Navigation keys The navigation keys are 4 rocker buttons which are used for forward and backward switching. 3 SCREEN Switches between the individual display settings (the "screens"). WINDOW Switches the focus to each of the panels open in the visible screen in sequence (the panel with the focus is active). SCAN Changes between the individual curve traces ("scans") in graphical displays so that, for example, measurement values can be read off from the curves using the cursor. PAGE Scrolls back and forward in the tables one page at a time. 0...9 Entry of numeric values . Entry of decimal point +/– Entry of sign abc Entry of letters Data entry keys Numeric keys Entry of a space *... # A Entry of special characters a Switchover between uppercase and lowercase letters Function keys MENU Displays the menu bar on the screen UNDO Deletes the character to the left of the cursor Undoes the action last performed ESC Closes the open window; the old value or parameter is retained ENTER Completes the data entry; the new value is adopted Confirms (OK) and closes open entry windows Pressing the rotary knob has the same effect 1146.2078.62 1.4 E-5 R&S UPV 4 Description of the Front Panel CONTROL panel The CONTROL panel contains the following operating functions. These functions are described in detail below: Start measurements / sweeps Loudspeaker control Hardcopy of the screen contents Shut down the operating system Switch between remote / manual operation Switch off outputs Keys for starting measurements and sweeps Keys for setting the loudspeaker 1146.2078.62 START Starts continuous measurements and sweeps (LED lights up); Resets Min/Max values for bargraph displays, averaging for measurement results, and limit overranging SINGLE Starts a single measurement or a single sweep (LED lights up during execution) STOP/CONT Measurement / sweep is stopped or continued (toggle function) ON Switches the loudspeaker or connected headphones on and off (toggle function) Volume Opens a window for adjusting the audio monitoring volume 1.5 E-5 Description of the Front Panel R&S UPV Keys for printing hardcopies, shutting down the operating system, switching between remote control/local operation, switching off outputs H COPY Depending on the settings under Utilities printout of the screen contents on the connected printed is started the screen contents are stored in a file 1146.2078.62 SHUTDOWN Stores the current settings on the hard disk and then shuts down the Windows operating system LOCAL Switches from remote control to manual operation; the LED lights up with remote control OUTPUT Switches all outputs of the measuring instrument off or on again; the LED lights up when the outputs are switched off 1.6 E-5 R&S UPV 5 Description of the Front Panel VARIATION panel Rotary knob Moves the focus in the panels, selection windows and tables Varies the entry value at the cursor position Moves the active cursor inside the graphical windows Pressing the rotary knob has the same effect as pressing the Enter key Cursor keys / Cursor keys Vary the entry value at the cursor position Move the active cursor inside the graphical windows Move the cursor position in entered values / 6 Move the focus in the panels, selection windows and tables USB connectors USB (Universal Serial Bus) interfaces of type A (host USB) for: connecting peripherals such as mouse, keyboard, printer connecting a USB stick for transferring files There are two additional USB interfaces (type A) at the rear of the instrument. 1146.2078.62 1.7 E-5 Description of the Front Panel 7 R&S UPV CD/DVD Combo drive The integrated combined CD/DVD drive is used to 8 – install software updates on the R&S UPV – install sequence programs and macros – import data and instrument settings from other R&S UPVs – store data on a CD Ground socket Connect ground socket with the instrument housing 9 Headphone connector Connection of headphones for audio monitoring of the analysis or generator signal 10 11 SETUP panel SAVE Opens a window for storing instrument settings LOAD Opens a window for loading predefined instrument settings PRESET Loads the factory settings of the instrument HELP key Pressing this key displays a context-sensitive help text 12 WINDOW panel 1146.2078.62 MODIFY Opens a selection of functions on the softkey bar; these functions can be used in conjunction with the rotary knob to move or resize the active panel or graphical window HIDE Minimizes ("hides") the active panel or graphical window CLOSE Closes the active panel or graphical window 1.8 E-5 R&S UPV 13 Description of the Front Panel Analog audio interfaces Output and input connectors of the analog generators and analyzers ATTENTION Risk of instrument damage The instrument complies with measuring category I; make sure that the input voltage at the connectors of the analog analyzers does not exceed 110 V (effective, sinusoidal) and 160 V (peak value). Do not use the instrument in measuring categories II, III and IV. Explanation: Measuring circuits as defined in section 6.7.4 of EN61010-1: Measuring category I is intended for measurements on circuits which are not connected to the high-voltage current system. 14 WINBAR key It is possible to toggle between the softkey bar and WINBAR at any time by pressing the WINBAR key: In normal operating mode, the softkey bar containing the functions available in the selection windows of the panels is visible; the softkeys permit rapid selection without needing to use the mouse. When the WINBAR key is pressed, the WINBAR containing the names of all opened panels / graphical windows is displayed in place of the softkey bar. Pressing the associated softkey puts the focus on the corresponding panel / graphical window, i.e. it becomes active. At the same time, the system returns to normal operating mode (see above). 1146.2078.62 1.9 E-5 Description of the Front Panel 15 R&S UPV Digital audio interfaces Inputs and outputs for connecting digital consumer devices and professional studio equipment. UNBAL BNC connectors OPTICAL Optical interface conforming to EIAJ CP-340, TOSLINK system BAL XLR female and male connector Note: These interfaces are only available when the R&S UPV-B2 or -B20 options have been installed. 16 Power switch The power switch switches on the instrument and starts the booting process. Warning: The instrument must be set up in such a way that operation of the power switch is not obstructed. Note: It is strongly recommended to shut down the operating system before switching off the instrument (using the SHUT-DOWN key or the mouse). 1146.2078.62 1.10 E-5 R&S UPV 17 Description of the Front Panel Status LEDs With the R&S UPV66 audio analyzer, the instrument’s state is indicated via LEDs. The individual LEDs have the following meaning: POWER ON: The instrument is switched on. SWITCH OFF: The operating system has been shut down; you can now switch off the instrument. LAN: The instrument is connected to a local area network. READY: The measuring instrument is ready for operation. BUSY: Illuminated as long as a measurement is running. REMOTE: The instrument is in remote-control operation. OUTPUT OFF: All outputs of the R&S UPV66 audio analyzer are switched off. GEN OVLD: The generator is overloaded. ANLR OVLD: The low impedance input resistors (300 Ohm or 600 Ohm) are overloaded and have been switched off. 1146.2078.62 1.11 E-5 Description of the Front Panel R&S UPV Rear Panel Fig. 1-3 Rear panel 1146.2078.62 1.12 E-5 R&S UPV Description of the Rear Panel Description of the Rear Panel This section provides an overview of the connectors at the rear of the R&S UPV. 1 LAN connection LAN interface Integration of the audio analyzer in a network Remote operation of the audio analyzer from a remote computer Remote control of the audio analyzer (with the R&S UPV-K4 option) 2 USB device connector USB device connector for remote operation of the audio analyzer (with the R&S UPV-K4 option). 3 RS-232-C interface RS-232-C interface, 9-pin D-Sub connector (male) To connect the R&S UPV via the RS-232-C interface, use a well-shielded cable. 4 Printer interface Parallel printer interface, 25-pin D-Sub connector (female) To connect a printer, use a well-shielded cable. 5 Connector for external monitor Connector for an external monitor, 15-pin D-Sub connector (female), 3-tier. Use a very well shielded cable with ferrite cores in order to connect the external monitor to the R&S UPV. 6 USB connectors USB (Universal Serial Bus) interfaces of type A (host USB). Connection of peripherals such as mouse, keyboard, printer Connection of a USB stick for transferring files There are additional USB interfaces on the front of the instrument. 1146.2078.62 1.13 E-5 Description of the Rear Panel R&S UPV BNC audio monitoring output 7 The signal that is output on these BNC connectors is the same as the signal on the headphone output on the front panel. Note: Requires the R&S UPV-U2 option (BNC audio monitoring outputs). 8 Trigger connectors 9 TRIG IN Input for triggering measurements TRIG OUT Trigger output and clock output Analog auxiliary output Additional analog output for special applications – DC output, e.g. for supplying power to hearing aids – Output for the analog generator signal via an integrated amplifier for the direct actuation of small loudspeakers 10 Digital synchronization and expansion interfaces Inputs and outputs for reference and sync signals for the R&S UPV-B2 option (digital audio interfaces) SYNC IN Synchronization input for word-clock signals SYNC OUT Output for synchronizing digital peripherals to the word clock or biphase clock of the R&S UPV AUX IN Input for a digital audio reference signal (DARS) AUX OUT Output for a digital audio reference signal (DARS) generated by the R&S UPV Note: These interfaces are only available in conjunction with the R&S UPV-B2 option. 1146.2078.62 1.14 E-5 R&S UPV 11 Description of the Rear Panel IEC/IEEE-bus connector IEC/IEEE-bus connector (IEC 625/IEEE 488) for remote control of the R&S UPV Note: Requires the R&S UPV-K4 option (remote control). 12 AC supply voltage connector AC supply voltage connector with indication of the set nominal AC supply voltage ATTENTION 13 Risk of instrument damage The R&S UPV must be set to the nominal voltage of the AC system used. Before switching on the instrument for the first time, check whether the correct AC supply voltage is set. Slots for expansion plug-ins In the rear panel of the R&S UPV, there are two slots into which expansion plug-ins can be inserted (see Chap. 4 and data sheet). For example, an I²S interface can be fitted in addition or alternatively to the optional digital audio interfaces on the front of the instrument. The left plug-in slot at the rear panel of the R&S UPV is designated as Slot 1, and the right one as Slot 2. 14 I²S interface The R&S UPV-B41 option, which is an I²S interface, is shown here as an example of how an expansion plug-in can be installed in addition to or as an alternative to any optional digital audio interfaces that may be present on the front panel of the instrument. I²S 25-contact D-Sub connector for connecting the input and output lines of the I²S interfaces. The interface assignment is described in Chapter 4. To connect the DUT, use a well-shielded cable. TX CLK IN Additional BNC connector for connecting an external master clock signal. Details are provided in Chapter 4. 1146.2078.62 1.15 E-5 Description of the Rear Panel 15 R&S UPV LAN Reset button The LAN RESET button has two functions: • Resets the LAN default settings: To do this, you have to press the button for 5 seconds until READY LED switches off on the front panel of the R&S UPV66. • Shuts down the operating system: If the operating system of the R&S UPV66 is to be shut down manually without using a mouse, you have to press the LAN RESET button three times within 5 seconds. Note: This button is present only on the R&S UPV66 model. 1146.2078.62 1.16 E-5 R&S UPV Putting into Operation Putting into Operation The following section describes how to put the instrument into operation and to connect peripherals such as printer and monitor. It contains general safety instructions for instrument operation. Installation of the options is described separately for each option in the respective sections of Chapter 4, "Instrument Functions"; software updates are explained in Chapter 8, "Maintenance and Interfaces". Unpacking the Instrument Remove the instrument from its packaging and check the equipment for completeness using the delivery note and the accessory lists for the various items. First, pull off the polyethylene protection pads from the instrument's rear feet and then carefully remove the pads from the instrument handles at the front. Pull off the corrugated cardboard cover that protects the rear of the instrument. Carefully unthread the corrugated cardboard cover at the front that protects the instrument handles and remove it. Check the instrument for any damage. If there is damage, immediately contact the carrier who delivered the instrument. In this case, make sure not to discard the box and packing material. It is advisable to keep the original packing material in order to prevent control elements and connectors from being damaged in case the instrument is to be transported or shipped at a later date. Setting up the Instrument or Installing it in a 19" Rack The instrument is designed for indoor use. It can either be set up as a separate unit or mounted in a 19" rack. A rack adapter (see the data sheet for the order number) is required for installation in a 19" rack . The mounting instructions are supplied with the adapter. CAUTION Risk of overheating To less airflow for cooling may cause overheating of the instrument. Prior to putting the instrument into operation always check for space between the ventilation holes and the rack casing to get sufficient air supply in the rack. 1146.2078.62 1.17 E-5 Putting into Operation R&S UPV Safety Instructions General Safety Instructions ATTENTION Instrument damage caused by disregarding the following precautions! Any non-compliance with the following precautions may cause damage to the instrument. Prior to putting the instrument into operation, check the following: The covers of the housing are in place and screwed on. Vents are not obstructed. Make sure that the air can escape freely through the vents at the rear and at the sides. The minimum distance to the wall should therefore be at least 10 cm. The signal levels at the inputs do not exceed permissible limits. The outputs of the instrument are not overloaded, incorrectly connected or the polarity is incorrect. The instrument should only be operated in horizontal position on an even surface. The ambient temperature must not exceed the range specified in the data sheet. The instrument complies with measuring category I; the input voltage at the connectors of the analog analyzers should not exceed 110 V (effective, sinusoidal) and 160 V (peak value). The instrument should not be used in measuring categories II, III and IV. Explanation: Measuring circuits as defined in section 6.7.4 of EN61010-1: Measuring category I is intended for measurements on circuits which are not connected to the high-voltage current system. Please also observe the instructions in the following sections and the general safety instructions at the beginning of this manual. Protection Against Electrostatic Discharge To avoid damaging the electronic components of the EUT due to electrostatic discharge produced by contact, the use of appropriate protective measures is recommended. 1146.2078.62 1.18 E-5 R&S UPV Putting into Operation Setting Up the Instrument WARNING Risk of injury and instrument damage. Safe operation with support feet! • Stacked instruments may slip off. Secure stacked instruments against slipping (e.g. by locking the feet to the top of the front-panel frame). The feet must be fully folded in or folded out. Only then a stable position of the instrument and reliable operation can be ensured. The uniform pressure on the folded-out feet must not exceed 500 N (weight of instrument and of equipment stacked on top). • When the instrument with expanded feet, the feet might collapse and fold in. Do not shift the instrument with the feet out. <500N Cleaning the Outside and Storing What is necessary is essentially the cleaning of the instrument. ATTENTION Instrument damage caused by cleaning agents! Cleaning agents contain substances that may damage the instrument, e.g. solventcontaining cleaning agents may damage the front panel labeling or plastic parts. Never use cleaning agents such as solvents (thinners, acetone, etc), acids, bases, or other substances. The outside of the instrument is suitably cleaned using a soft, line-free dust cloth. EMC Safety Precautions To prevent electromagnetic interference, only suitable, shielded signal and control cables should be used. 1146.2078.62 1.19 E-5 Putting into Operation R&S UPV Connecting the R&S UPV to the AC Supply The power supply connector is at the rear of the instrument (see below). The Audio Analyzer R&S UPV can be set up for connection to AC supply systems of 100 V, 120 V, 220 V and 230 V and can be operated with ±10% tolerance and an AC supply frequency of 47 Hz to 63 Hz. The instrument is also suitable for operation with power supply systems with the other nominal voltages specified in the table below : Nominal AC supply voltage Voltage selector setting 100 V 110 V 120 V 115 V 120 V 127 V 120 V 240 V 230 V Tolerance of Instrument +4% -18% +20% -6% +15% -10% +4% -18% +10% -14% Setting the AC Supply Voltage ATTENTION Danger of instrument impairment Before switching on the instrument for the first time, check whether the correct AC supply voltage is set. If the AC supply voltage is not correct, it must be adjusted in the following way: Disconnect the power cable. Open the flap covering the voltage selector using a small screwdriver (or similar). Remove the cylinder labeled with the nominal voltages and reinsert it so that the value visible through the hole in the cover flap when refitted corresponds to the desired nominal voltage. If the desired voltage is not printed on the cylinder, select the nearest suitable value according to the table above. Close the flap. Note: The Audio Analyzer R&S UPV is operated with the same fuses for all of the specified nominal AC supply voltages. The precise designation of the fuses is indicated on the rear of the instrument . 1146.2078.62 1.20 E-5 R&S UPV Putting into Operation Switching On Connect the audio analyzer to the power supply system using the supplied power cable. Note: Since the instrument is in compliance with safety class EN61010-1, it should only be connected to a socket with earthing contact. Press the power switch on the front of the instrument. The instrument starts the booting process and all modules are supplied with power. Start Screen and Booting of the R&S UPV After the instrument has been switched on, the installed BIOS version and the processor details are displayed on the screen for a few seconds. After this, the WindowsXP operating system boots first followed by the instrument firmware. During booting of the instrument firmware, a self-test is performed. The most recent instrument settings saved automatically at power-off are then loaded so that the instrument is in the same state as it was before power-off. After booting is completed, the audio analyzer screen appears and the instrument is ready to be operated. Note: If the software should crash unexpectedly and the instrument is operated via the front panel, it can only be rebooted by pressing the power switch. If the instrument is operated using an external keyboard, it is recommended to attempt a restart by pressing Ctr+Alt+Del (warm start) first. 1146.2078.62 1.21 E-5 Putting into Operation R&S UPV Restarting the R&S UPV If the R&S UPV firmware was closed without shutting down the operating system icon in the title bar), (e.g. by clicking the the program can be restarted in two different ways using the mouse: Click the "R&S UPV" icon on the desktop Click the start button in the task bar, then select the folders "All Programs", "Rohde & Schwarz", "UPV" and click the "R&S UPV" icon. Switching off the instrument R&S UPV model: Press the SHUT-DOWN button on the front of the instrument. The R&S UPV will save the current settings to hard disk and then shut down the operating system. Note: If the instrument is operating under mouse control, it is also possible to shut down the operating system by using the same method as is commonly used in Windows applications. R&S UPV66 model: Press the LAN REST key at the rear of the instrument three times within 5 seconds. The R&S UPV66 stores the current settings on the hard disk and then shuts down the operating system. With remote control, you can also shut down the operating system by using the SYSTem:SHUTdown command. Alternatively, the operating system can also be shut down in the same way as other Windows applications by using the mouse. As soon as the operating system is shut down, the SWITCH OFF LED will illuminate. You can disconnect the instrument from the supply system via the power switch. 1146.2078.62 1.22 E-5 R&S UPV Putting into Operation Press the power switch on the front of the instrument. The instrument will be disconnected from the AC mains, and power will be removed from all modules. ATTENTION 1146.2078.62 Danger of data loss or instrument impairment! Switching off the instrument without first shutting down the operating system in an orderly manner can cause loss of data or problems with the boot process the next time the instrument is switched on. 1.23 E-5 Function Check R&S UPV Function Check The audio analyzer monitors the most important instrument functions automatically when it is switched on. Presets Pressing the PRESET set here are: key loads a set of defined instrument settings. The most important parameters Generator frequency (analog) 1 kHz Generator level (analog) 0.1 V Generator signal Sinusoidal Generator frequency (digital) 997 Hz Generator level (digital) 0.1 FS Generator signal Sinusoidal Analyzer interface (analog) XLR measuring input (analog) Analyzer interface (digital) XLR measuring input (digital) Analyzer function RMS Frequency measurement ON The preset function sets all parameters and settings, even those of inactive operating modes. 1146.2078.62 1.24 E-5 R&S UPV Windows XP Windows XP ATTENTION Possible impairment of the instrument functioning The instrument is equipped with the WindowsXP operating system. It is thus possible to install commercial off-the-shelf software on the instrument. The use and installation of commercial off-the-shelf software may impair the instrument function. For this reason, we recommend that you only execute programs tested by Rohde & Schwarz with regard to their compatibility with the instrument software. The drivers and programs used on the instrument under WindoesXP have been adapted to the instrument. Existing instrument software must only be modified with update software released by Rohde & Schwarz. The audio analyzer has the WindowsXP operating system. When supplied, the configuration of this operating system is optimized to the functions of the audio analyzer. Changes in the system setup are only required when peripherals like keyboard and printer are installed or in the event that the network configuration does not comply with the default settings (see sections below). When the audio analyzer is switched on, the operating system boots and the instrument firmware is then started automatically without a password query (auto login). Note: Auto login is performed with the user name and the password "instrument". The standard user has administrator rights so that printer and network installations are possible. The operating system can only be accessed if an external keyboard is connected. Pressing the Windows key on the external keyboard (next to the CTRL key) opens the WindowsXP Start menu where the WindowsXP programs can be called up. Connecting a mouse makes WindowsXP easier to use. The system settings under WindowsXP are made in the menu Start – Settings - Control Panel (the required settings can be found in the descriptions of WindowsXP and the hardware). The R&S UPV does not have a floppy disk drive. Data is exchanged using a USB stick which is inserted into one of the USB interfaces. The USB stick is automatically assigned a free drive letter and the data can be transferred in Windows Explorer. 1146.2078.62 1.25 E-5 Connecting an External Keyboard R&S UPV Connecting an External Keyboard A commercially available, external keyboard with USB interface can be connected to the R&S UPV. A keyboard simplifies the input of list entries, comment texts, file names, etc and is required for operating WindowsXP . The keyboard is connected to one of the USB interfaces at the front or rear of the instrument. The keyboard is detected automatically when it is connected. The US keyboard assignment is the default setting. The keyboard language and special settings, e.g. the repeat rate and so on, can be changed in the WindowsXP menu Start - Control Panel - Keyboard or Regional and Language Options. The menu is opened by pressing the Windows key on the external keyboard . Connecting a Mouse A commercially available mouse with USB interface can be connected to the R&S UPV. The mouse makes it easier to move and resize the panels / graphical windows on the screen and provides alternative operating modes. It is recommended for easy operation of WindowsXP . The mouse is connected to one of the USB interfaces on the front or rear of the instrument. The mouse is detected automatically when it is connected. Special settings, e.g. the speed of the mouse pointer and so on, can be made in the WindowsXP menu Start - Control Panel - Mouse. The menu is opened by pressing the Windows key on the external keyboard. 1146.2078.62 1.26 E-5 R&S UPV Connecting an External Monitor Connecting an External Monitor ATTENTION Danger of damage to the monitor or the instrument Make sure that the instrument is switched off before connecting the monitor. The monitor and the R&S UPV could otherwise be damaged. Do not modify the screen driver (Display type) and the display configuration since this will impair instrument operation. An external monitor with an analog interface can be connected to the MONITOR connector at the rear of the R&S UPV. The connector interface is described in Chapter 8 "Maintenance and Interfaces". Connection To prevent damage to the monitor and R&S UPV, the instrument must be switched off before an external monitor is connected. After connection, the external monitor is detected when the instrument is started (but not if it is connected while the instrument is in operation). The screen display with all elements, e.g. panels, measurement displays, WINBAR and so on, then appears both on the external screen and on the instrument. No further settings are required. 1146.2078.62 1.27 E-5 Changing the screen resolution R&S UPV Changing the screen resolution The R&S UPV audio analyzer comes with a built-in PC. Before March 2007, the instruments were supplied with a PC carrying the Rohde & Schwarz designation FMR6; instruments supplied as of March 2007 include a PC of the FMR7 type. The procedure for setting the screen resolution when using an external monitor is different for the two PC models. The procedure for each is described below. FMR6 Set external screen resolution to higher than 800 x 600 pixels. Switch off the R&S UPV. Connect external screen, keyboard, and mouse to the R&S UPV. Switch on the R&S UPV. After starting the R&S UPV, terminate or minimize the R&S UPV program by buttons on the right-hand edge of the title bar. clicking the Using the right mouse button, click the desktop to open the following context menu. Select Graphics properties… 1146.2078.62 1.28 E-5 R&S UPV Click Changing the screen resolution and place the focus on the True Color field, as shown in the screenshot below. Press the TAB key three times to select the invisible button; then press the space key. Now press the Apply key. The internal LC screen (digital display) will be switched off. Click OK to confirm the change. Now click OK again to close the window. You can now set the external screen to a resolution higher than 800 x 600 pixels. Using the right mouse button, click the desktop to open the following context menu again. Select Graphics properties… 1146.2078.62 1.29 E-5 Changing the screen resolution R&S UPV From the Screen Area field, select the resolution you want, e.g. 1024 by 768. Click Apply. Click OK to confirm the change. Now click OK again to close the window. Reset external screen resolution to 800 x 600 pixels. External keyboard and mouse are connected to the R&S UPV. Terminate or minimize the UPV program buttons on the right-hand edge of the title bar. by clicking the Using the right mouse button, click the desktop to open the following context menu. Select Graphics Properties... 1146.2078.62 1.30 E-5 R&S UPV Click Changing the screen resolution and place the focus on the Monitor field, as shown in the screenshot below. Press the TAB key three times to select the invisible button. Now press the space key and then the Apply button. The resolution will be reset to 800 x 600 pixels. This is the same as for the internal LC screen, which will be switched on again. Click OK to confirm the change. Now click OK again to close the window. 1146.2078.62 1.31 E-5 Changing the screen resolution R&S UPV FMR7 Set external screen to a resolution higher than 800 x 600 pixels. Switch off the R&S UPV. Connect external screen and mouse to the R&S UPV. Switch on the R&S UPV. After starting the R&S UPV, terminate or minimize the UPV program by buttons on the right-hand edge of the title bar. clicking the Using the right mouse button, click the desktop to open the following context menu. Select Monitor Switch off the internal LC screen and switch on the external screen if it was previously switched off. Now you can set the external screen to a resolution higher than 800 x 600 pixels. Using the right mouse button, click the desktop to open the following context menu again. Select Graphics Properties… 1146.2078.62 1.32 E-5 R&S UPV Changing the screen resolution Select Display Settings, and then select the resolution you want, e.g. 1024 x 768 pixels. Click Apply Click OK to confirm the change, and then click OK again to close the window. Reset external screen to a resolution of 800 x 600 pixels A mouse is connected to the R&S UPV. Terminate or minimize the UPV program by clicking the buttons on the right-hand edge of the title bar. Using the right mouse button, click the desktop to open the following context menu. 1146.2078.62 1.33 E-5 Changing the screen resolution R&S UPV Select Digital Diplay and Monitor Reset resolution to 800 x 600 pixels, which is the same resolution as for the internal LC screen, which is switched on again. Switch off external screen Using the right mouse button, click the desktop to open the following context menu. Select Digital Display. The external screen will be switched off. Important The graphics driver of the FMR7 PC module in the R&S UPV saves the screen configuration that was last selected and detects whether an external monitor is connected. If the R&S UPV was previously operated only with an external monitor and was switched off in that state, the internal screen will remain deactivated the next time the R&S UPV is switched on if no external monitor is connected. Since no external monitor is detected in this case when the instrument is switched on, the monitor output will remain deactivated even if a monitor is connected at a later time. To reactivate the screen display, you need an external keyboard: By using the key combination CTRL + ALT + F1 on an external keyboard, you can switch to the external monitor. By using the key combination CTRL + ALT + F4 on an external keyboard, you can switch on the screen. From march 2008 R&S UPV is shipped with a new LCD, which can be switched on using the key combination CTRL + ALT + F3. 1146.2078.62 1.34 E-5 R&S UPV Installing Options Installing Options The R&S UPV can be equipped with numerous options. These options can be divided into three basic categories: Software options Can be installed by the user himself; a unique activation code supplied with the option is required. Hardware plug-ins Inserted into the appropriate slots in the rear of the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV (usually by a Rohde & Schwarz Service Center). Hardware options Installed in the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV; these options can only be retrofitted by a Rohde & Schwarz Service Center. 1146.2078.62 1.35 E-5 Connecting the R&S UPV to a Network (LAN) R&S UPV Connecting the R&S UPV to a Network (LAN) The R&S UPV has a network connector and can be connected to a LAN (Local Area Network). Network administrators with the appropriate rights can transfer files across the network and use network resources such as the network directories or printers. The instrument can also be remote-controlled and manually operated in the network. With manual remote operation, the R&S UPV can be operated from an external computer at any remote location. For example, from your desk you can operate one or more R&S UPVs that are part of a test setup located in another section of the building. The R&S UPV comes equipped with an activated WindowsXP® firewall. File transfer via LAN or manual remote operation using the remote desktop requires only a partial exception in the firewall. It is advisable to coordinate the configuration of the firewall with the network administrator. Remote control of the instrument via the LAN interface is described in Chapter 5, "Remote Control Fundamentals". Connection to the Network ATTENTION Risk of network errors! Connecting errors may affect the entire network. We recommend that connection of the instrument to the network be co-ordinated with the network administrator. Do not connect or disconnect the network cable until the instrument is switched off (standby). Only then the network connection can be reliably detected and impairments to instrument operation can be avoided. The instrument is connected to the network using a commercially available RJ45 cable connected to the LAN interface at the rear of the instrument. The connector is described in Chapter 8 "Maintenance and Interfaces". 1146.2078.62 1.36 E-5 R&S UPV Connecting the R&S UPV to a Network (LAN) Configuring the R&S UPV for Network Operation The network interface operates with 100 MHz-Ethernet IEEE 802.3u. The TCP/IP network protocol and the associated network services are preconfigured. In order to exchange data in a local network (LAN), each connected computer or instrument must have a unique IP address or a unique computer name. In addition, network access of the different users is organized by the assignment of access rights. The access rights determine which of the available network resources, e.g. file storage systems, are available for the R&S UPV. Networks with DHCP The R&S UPV is preconfigured for networks using DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). In these networks, the R&S UPV is automatically assigned a free IP address. In this case, a unique computer name is used for identification in the network. Each R&S UPV is given a unique computer name at the factory. This name can be queried and changed in the WindowsXP menu Start - My Computer (see "Querying the Computer Name" below). Networks with fixed IP addresses In networks using fixed IP addresses, usually the network operator organizes the addresses. The IP address has to be entered in the Windows menue Start - Control Panel (see "Entering the IP Address"). Point-to-point connections To set up a simple network (a LAN connection between an R&S UPV and a computer without integration in a large network), an IP address must be assigned to the R&S UPV and the computer. The IP addresses 192.168.xxx.yyy are available, whereby both xxx and yyy can have the values 1 to 254; the value for the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0. In this case, a commercially available cross-over RJ45 cable must be used for the connection. User ID The user "instrument" is set for the R&S UPV. The user is used for the auto login when the instrument is started and for manual remote operation. The password is also "instrument". By assigning the respective rights, the network administrator decides which directories and resources in the network can be accessed by the R&S UPV. 1146.2078.62 1.37 E-5 Connecting the R&S UPV to a Network (LAN) R&S UPV Preparations The instrument is configured for network operation in the menus of the WindowsXP operating system. The operating system can only be accessed if an external keyboard is connected; connection of a mouse is recommended for easy operation. The instrument should be switched off before the keyboard and mouse are connected. This will ensure that the keyboard and mouse are correctly detected by the operating system. Entering the IP Address The default setting is "Obtain an IP address automatically" (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)). 1. Start – Settings – Control Panel 2. Click Network and Internet Connections and then click Network Connections bottom right in this menu. 1146.2078.62 1.38 E-5 R&S UPV Connecting the R&S UPV to a Network (LAN) 3. In the Network Connections menu, right-click Local Area Connection and then click the Properties button. 4. On the General tab, select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) in the field This connection uses the following items: and then click the Properties button. 5. In the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties menu, enter the IP address in the Use the following IP address: field (all data can be accessed by the network administrator). Terminate the entry in all menus with OK. 1146.2078.62 1.39 E-5 Connecting the R&S UPV to a Network (LAN) R&S UPV Querying the Computer Name 1. Click Start – Settings – Control Panel: Performance and Maintenance. 2. Click System and select the Computer Name tab in the menu. The computer name is displayed under Full Computer Name:. The name can be changed in the Change submenu. 1146.2078.62 1.40 E-5 R&S UPV Connecting the R&S UPV to a Network (LAN) Accessing Directories in the Network Access to network drives depends on access rights and whether the drives in question have been enabled. The complete integration of the R&S UPV in a large network with the necessary assignment of rights is highly complex and normally performed by a network administrator. Accessing the hard disk of a computer connected to the network from the R&S UPV is, however, relatively easy. The directory which the R&S UPV is to access simply has to be enabled on the remote computer. This directory is then accessed from the R&S UPV using a WindowsXP search function. This procedure is also of importance for a point-to-point connection, for instance in order to start a firmware update for which the files have been stored on the hard disk of the remote computer. Note: Both the computer and the audio analyzer must have a computer name and an IP address (see the section "Configuring the R&S UPV for Network Operation") Enabling the desired directory on the remote computer Note: The menu name may deviate from the name specified in the operating sequence, depending on the language and on the operating system used on the computer. 1. On the computer, select the directory to be enabled in Windows Explorer and right-click to call up the Properties menu. 2. In the Sharing panel, activate the Share this folder tick box. 3. Write down the name of the computer (see the section "Querying the Computer Name"). Accessing the enabled directory from the R&S UPV 1. Press the Windows key to call up the Start menu. 2. In the Search menu, select Computers or People and then A Computer on the Network. 3. Enter the name of the computer under Which Computer you are looking for? and start the search by pressing Enter. The name of the computer is given as the search result. 4. Click the computer name. The enabled directory is displayed and the files stored there can be used in the R&S UPV. Note: If a user name and password are requested when you click the computer, the login name and password used on the computer must be entered. 1146.2078.62 1.41 E-5 Connecting the R&S UPV to a Network (LAN) R&S UPV Configuration via LXI (R&S UPV66) LAN eXtensions for Instrumentation (LXI) is an instrumentation platform for measuring instruments and test systems that is based on standard Ethernet technology. LXI is intended to be the LAN-based successor to GPIB, combining the advantages of Ethernet with the simplicity and familiarity of GPIB. This standard provides a new way for configuring virtual front panel instruments by using a network and a Web interface. The main tool for this configuration method is a browser, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer, but it is also possible to use other browsers such as Firefox or Netscape. LXI classes and LXI functionality LXI-compliant instruments are divided into three classes, A, B and C, with the functionality of the classes hierarchically based one upon the other: • Class C instruments are characterized by a common LAN implementation, including an ICMP ping responder for diagnostics. The instruments can be configured via a web browser; a LAN Configuration Initialize (LCI) mechanism resets the LAN configuration. The LXI class C instruments shall also support automatic detection in a LAN via the VXI-11 discovery protocol and programming by means of IVI drivers. • Class B adds IEEE 1588 Precision Time Protocol (PTP) and peer-to-peer communication to the base class. IEEE 1588 allows all instruments on the same network to automatically synchronize to the most accurate clock available and then provide time stamps or time-based synchronization signals to all instruments with exceptional accuracy. • Class A instruments are additionally equipped with the eight-channel hardware trigger bus (LVDS interface) defined in the LXI standard. Instruments of classes A and B can generate and receive software triggers via LAN messages and communicate with each other without involving the controller. 1146.2078.62 1.42 E-5 R&S UPV Connecting the R&S UPV to a Network (LAN) The R&S UPV66 complies with LXI class C. In addition to the general class C features described above, it provides the following LXI-related functionality: • Integrated display of the current instrument settings • Possibility of remote controlling the instrument within the WEB browser. Note: LXI is only available as a standard feature with the R&S UPV66, but it can also be retrofitted to the R&S UPV if necessary. The LXI functionality for R&S UPV requires a Windows XP operating system with service pack 2, which may not yet be installed on older instruments. In this case please contact your Rohde & Schwarz service representative. The version of the operating system can be checked in the General menu of the Instrument Properties dialog. LXI LAN Indicator The LAN Indicator at the front panel of the R&S UPV66 always gives an information about the accessibility of the instrument via LAN. The indicator lights in green color and has three states. LAN Indicator is OFF The instrument has no valid IP address. This may happen on one of following reasons: 1) the device is configured with DHCP but no DHCP router present, 2) the device is configured manually and has a IP address conflict, 3) the device lost a DHCP configured IP address and switched to Auto IP. This state is called "error state" and normally can be resolved by the LCI mechanism (LAN reset). This mechanism also is required by the standard and can be invoked with the "LAN RESET" button on the rear side of the instrument. Please refer to the section "Description of the Rear Panel" in the same chapter for further details. LAN Indicator is ON The instrument has a valid IP address and is reachable via TCP/IP. LAN Indicator flashes The instrument is in the "Device Indicator" state initiated by the WEB interface. This state is required by the standard and is used for finding instruments in racks. Please refer to the section "LXI Browser Interface" for further details. 1146.2078.62 1.43 E-5 Connecting the R&S UPV to a Network (LAN) R&S UPV LXI Default State of Network Settings After an LCI (LAN reset) the instrument automatically reboots and starts up with following LAN settings: Parameter Value Hostname RSUPV66-Description Audio Analyzer TCP/IP Mode DHCP + Auto IP Address Dynamic DNS Enabled ICMP Ping Enabled Negotiation Auto Detect VXI-11 Discovery Enabled Password for LAN Configuration LxiWebIfc Tip: For information about the LXI standard refer to the LXI website at http://www.lxistandard.org. See also "News from Rohde & Schwarz, article 2006/II - 190". LXI Browser Interface The only information necessary for performing configuration via the LXI/Web interface is the name of the instrument (which means its Windows name) in networks that operate with DHCP enabled, or its IP address in networks that operate with manual network configuration. In rare cases where neither one of these names is known, it is also possible to derive the IP address from the MAC address, which is printed on the rear panel of the instrument. The instrument's LXI browser interface works correctly with all W3C compliant browsers. Typing the instrument's host name or IP address in the address field of the browser on your PC, e.g. http://rsupv66-100002 or http://10.113.10.203 opens the Instrument Home Page (welcome page).The instrument name is always RSUPV66-xxxxxx for the R&S UPV66, where “xxxxxx” stands for the six-digit serial number of the instrument. 1146.2078.62 1.44 E-5 R&S UPV Connecting the R&S UPV to a Network (LAN) The instrument home page shows all important information in a compact form. This includes the MAC address and the IP address, which is often assigned dynamically, as well as the full resource string for VISA remote control (see Chapter 5, Remote Control via LAN Interface). The LAN indicator on the instrument will blink if Device Indicator is set to ACTIVE. Pressing the INACTIVE (press to toggle) button alternately enables and disables the Device Indicator function. It can be used to quickly identify an instrument that is mounted together with several other instruments of the same type, such as in a 19" rack. Pressing ACTIVE (press to toggle) disables the blinking function. A navigation panel is displayed on the left-hand side of the window, with a link to the important LAN Configuration page. This page of the LXI Web configuration website enables extensive configuration of all important LAN parameters, which is necessary because the configuration steps mentioned in the next sections cannot be performed as described with a virtual front panel instrument. Note: Changing the LAN configuration is password-protected. The password reads LxiWebIfc (notice upper and lower case characters). This password cannot be changed in the current firmware version. 1146.2078.62 1.45 E-5 Connecting the R&S UPV to a Network (LAN) R&S UPV IP Configuration TCP/IP Mode Determines whether DHCP is enabled or disabled. The IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway and DNS Server configuration fields are only enabled if DHCP is disabled. Consult the network administrator if it is necessary to modify these settings or any other settings. Note: Switching from DHCP enabled mode to manual configuration mode may trigger an instrument restart when the new setting is confirmed (depends on the configuration). If incorrect network configuration settings have been entered, LAN RESET on the rear panel of the instrument must be used to restore access to the Web interface. IP Address Allows the IP address of the instrument to be modified if DHCP is disabled. Subnet Mask, Default Gateway It is sometimes necessary to change these settings from the displayed default values when DHCP is disabled. Consult the network administrator for the proper values if it is necessary to modify these settings. DNS Server This is the IP address of the domain name server of the network segment. Consult the network administrator if it is necessary to modify this setting when operating with DHCP disabled. Dynamic DNS Allows different DNS servers to be addressed in succession. Consult the network administrator if it is necessary to modify this setting when operating with DHCP disabled. 1146.2078.62 1.46 E-5 R&S UPV Connecting the R&S UPV to a Network (LAN) Advanced LAN Configuration Advanced LAN Configuration provides LAN settings that are not declared mandatory by the LXI standard. These advanced parameters should only be modified by experienced users. Negotiation The Negotiation configuration field provides different Ethernet speed and duplex mode settings. In general, the Auto Detect mode is sufficient. ICMP Ping ICMP Ping must be enabled to use the ping utility. VXI-11 Discovery Enables or prevents discovering the instrument via the “VXI-11 Discovery” protocol, which is a protocol jointly developed by National Instruments and VISA for searching for devices on aLAN. VXI-11 is the protocol that is used for discovery of the instrument in the LAN. According to the standard, LXI devices must use VXI-11 to provide a discovery mechanism; other additional discovery mechanisms are permitted. 1146.2078.62 1.47 E-5 Connecting the R&S UPV to a Network (LAN) R&S UPV Ping Client Ping is a utility that verifies the connection between the LXI-compliant instrument and another device. The ping command uses the ICMP echo request and echo reply packets to determine whether the LAN connection is functional. Ping is useful for diagnosing IP network or router failures. The ping utility is not password-protected. To initiate a ping between the LXI-compliant instrument and a second connected device, 1. Enable ICMP Ping on the Advanced LAN Configuration page (enabled after an LCI). 2. Enter the IP address of the second device without the ping command and without any further parameters into the Destination Address field (e.g. 10.113.10.203). 3. Click Submit. 1146.2078.62 1.48 E-5 R&S UPV Connecting the R&S UPV to a Network (LAN) Configuration for Manual Remote Operation The R&S UPV can be operated manually from an external computer via a network connection. The Windows program Remote Desktop Connection is used for operation. Manual remote operation is described in Chapter 3 in the section "Manual Remote Operation". Manual remote operation of the audio analyzer is only possible if - the Windows 95 operating system or higher and the Remote Desktop Connection program are installed on the external computer and a LAN interface is configured for the network - the audio analyzer and the computer are connected via the LAN (see "Configuring the R&S UPV for Network Operation") - the Remote Desktop Connection program is activated on the audio analyzer (see "Activating the Remote Desktop Connection program at the R&S UPV") - the R&S UPV data has been entered in the Remote Desktop Connection program on the external computer (IP address or computer name of the R&S UPV in the network (see "Querying the Computer Name")) - the user has logged on at the R&S UPV from the external computer by entering the correct user name (instrument) and the correct password (instrument) (see "Starting manual remote operation at the external computer") 1146.2078.62 1.49 E-5 Connecting the R&S UPV to a Network (LAN) R&S UPV Activating the Remote Desktop Connection program at the R&S UPV ATTENTION Risk of unauthorized access! After activation of the remote desktop, any user on the network who knows the computer name and login data of the audio analyzer can access this R&S UPV. 1. Click Start – Settings – Control Panel: Performance and Maintenance. 2. Click System and select the Remote tab in the menu. 3. Activate the Allow users to connect remotely to this computer tick box. 1146.2078.62 1.50 E-5 R&S UPV Connecting the R&S UPV to a Network (LAN) Starting manual remote operation at the external computer The Remote Desktop Connection program is already installed in the WindowsXP operating system. For all other Windows operating systems from Windows95 and higher, the program can be downloaded free-of-charge from the Internet (http://www.microsoft.com). It can be loaded onto any external computer by following the instructions also provided on the Internet. 1. If necessary, install the Remote Desktop Connection program on the external computer. 2. Start the program in the Windows menu Start - All Programs - Accessories - Communications. Before the program can be used for the first time, the instrument and user ID of the R&S UPV must be entered on the external computer. The instrument ID (i.e. the computer name of the R&S UPV) identifies the R&S UPV in the network. Every R&S UPV is supplied together with a computer name which can be used for manual remote operation. Querying the computer name is described in the section "Querying the Computer Name". The user ID is necessary as it authorizes access to the R&S UPV. It is preset on the R&S UPV and is instrument for both the user name and the password. No entry is needed in the Domain field. 3. Enter the instrument and user ID on the General tab of the extended Remote Desktop Connection menu (called up by pressing the Options>> button). 1146.2078.62 1.51 E-5 Connecting the R&S UPV to a Network (LAN) R&S UPV 4. The login data can be stored with the Save As button. If it is stored as the file default.rdp, the connection to the R&S UPV is offered by default when the program is started. If it is stored under a different name, the setting for the connection to the R&S UPV is offered in the selection list which is displayed by pressing the Computer: field. button in the 5. Set the display resolution of the R&S UPV screen to 800 x 600 on the Display tab. 6. Set up the connection by pressing the Connect button. When the connection has been set up, the audio analyzer screen appears on the external computer. Operation is possible with the mouse and/or the keyboard. Keys on the front panel which do not have a direct equivalent on the keyboard can be replaced by key combinations (see the table in Chapter 3 in the section "Operation Using an External PC Keyboard"). If several R&S UPVs are to be manually operated from one computer by means of manual remote control, a separate Remote Desktop Control window must be opened for each R&S UPV. This is possible by repeatedly starting the program on the external computer. 1146.2078.62 1.52 E-5 R&S UPV Firmware update Firmware update The R&S UPV firmware is supplied in a file named "setupxxxRelease.exe". The sequence of digits for "xxx" consists of the main version number followed by the subversion number, revision number and build number. The initial installation and firmware updates are carried out by starting this EXE file. By doing this you start an Installer program which automatically checks which type of installation is necessary: Main installation Major update Minor update The Installer displays what it has found out about the environment into which the firmware will be installed and how much disk space is needed. It then takes you through the "Setup Wizard". You normally just click the "Next" button to go from step to step. The Installer detects that the installed firmware is too old for a minor update to be carried out. It therefore displays a message asking you to uninstall the old software completely. The Installer simply displays a short prompt asking whether you wish to update the firmware. The rest is performed automatically. The two most common problems that can occur when installing the software (or during a major update) are these: a) At the very start, before the progress bar appears, the progress window displays the message "Installshield is preparing installscript“. Occasionally you then see an error message and installation is canceled. This problem can usually be solved by restarting Windows and carrying out the firmware installation again. b) When the Installer has installed the firmware and the progress bar is full, the progress window displays the message "Removing Backup Files", "Registering Components" or "Publishing Product Information". Here, too, it occasionally happens that an error message is followed by a second message, and the firmware is then not installed. This problem can sometimes be solved by restarting Windows and carrying out the setup again. If the error occurs again, this may be for two reasons: 1) Installation of the front panel driver went wrong. In this case, you must install it using the Windows Wizard; the necessary INF file is called c:\UPV\fpnl_wdm.inf. You should now reinstall the firmware. 2) The installation of additional Windows settings went wrong. In this case, execute the files "C:\UPV\ScanFirmwareVersions.exe" and "C:\UPV\SetReg.exe" one after the other. You should now reinstall the firmware. If neither of these steps is successful, the instrument needs to go in for service (or the Windows image program must be reloaded). 1146.2078.62 1.53 E-5 Windows XP Recovery and Backup R&S UPV Windows XP Recovery and Backup The R&S UPV provides an invisible backup and recovery partition. A backup of the factory system partition (C:\) is stored per default and can be recovered in case of a system crash. In addition, backups of up to 5 firmware versions can be stored on this partition. It is e.g. possible to backup the current system partition prior to a firmware update or to provide different system configurations for different environments. When recovered, the system partition (C:\) is deleted, formatted and then newly written. The data partition (D:\) is not affected. Call the Windows XP Recovery and Backup Partition Menu 1. Switch the instrument off and on again 2. In the boot menu select line Backup/Recovery with the up/down cursors. 3. Open Windows XP Recovery and Backup Partition menu by pressing the rotary knob. The menu shows the available selections for the recovery and backup partition: Note: If several backups are already stored on the disk, the remaining space might not be sufficient for an additional backup. In this case a warning is indicated in the Windows XP Recovery and Backup Partition menu and the user is requested to remove an old backup before making a new one. 1146.2078.62 1.54 E-5 R&S UPV Windows XP Recovery and Backup Backup Current System Partition 1. Select the Make Backup button in the Windows XP Recovery and Backup Partition menu with the rotary knob. 2. Open the Make Backup menu with the ENTER key. The menu shows the current versions of the firmware and the software platform. 3. Select the Make Backup button with the rotary knob. 4. Start the backup with the ENTER key. After the backup, the Windows XP Recovery and Backup Partition menu appears again. 5. Select the Exit and Shutdown button with the rotary knob. 6. Exit and shut down with the ENTER key. 1146.2078.62 1.55 E-5 Windows XP Recovery and Backup R&S UPV Recover Selected Version of System Partition 1. Select the Restore Backup button in the Windows XP Recovery and Backup Partition menu with the rotary knob to recover a selected version of the system partition. 2. Open the Restore Backup menu with the ENTER key. The menu shows the versions of the firmware and the software platform of the backup displayed in the Select Backup window. 3. Select the Select Backup window with the rotary knob. 4. Select the backup to be restored with the up/down cursor keys and the ENTER key. 5. Select the Restore button with the rotary knob. 6. Start the recovery with the ENTER key. The script that is performed during recovery is displayed. After the recovery, the instrument is shut down and switched off. 1146.2078.62 1.56 E-5 R&S UPV Windows XP Recovery and Backup Recover Factory Default 1. Select the Factory Default button in the Windows XP Recovery and Backup Partition menu with the rotary knob to recover the factory version of the system partition. 2. Open the Factory Default menu with the ENTER key. The menu shows the versions of the firmware and the software platform on delivery. 3. Select the Recover now button with the rotary knob. 4. Start the recovery with the ENTER key. The script that is performed during recovery is displayed. After the recovery, the instrument is shut down and switched off. 1146.2078.62 1.57 E-5 Windows XP Recovery and Backup R&S UPV Delete Backups Up to five backups in addition to the factory default can be stored on the recovery partition. To provide space for new backups, it might be necessary to remove older backups. The factory default cannot be deleted. 1. Select Remove Backup button in the Windows XP Recovery and Backup Partition menu with the rotary knob to delete a selected backup. 2. Open the Remove Backup menu with the ENTER key. The menu shows the versions of the firmware and the software platform of the backup displayed in the Select Backup window. 3. Select the Select Backup window with the rotary knob. 4. Select the backup to be deleted with the up/down cursor keys and the ENTER key. 5. Select the Remove button with the rotary knob. 6. Start the deletion with the ENTER key. After the deletion, the instrument returns to the Remove Backup menu as long as backups are still available. If the last backup is deleted, the Windows XP Recovery and Backup Partition menu opens again. 7. Select the Cancel button with the rotary knob. 8. Close the Remove Backup menu with the ENTER key. The Windows XP Recovery and Backup Partition menu opens. 9. Select the Exit and Shutdown button with the rotary knob. 10. Exit the menu and shut down the instrument with the ENTER key. 1146.2078.62 1.58 E-5 R&S UPV Contents - Getting Started Contents - Chapter 2 "Getting Started" 2 Getting Started ..............................................................................................................................2.1 Introduction - Getting Started .........................................................................................................2.1 Important Information for Measurements ......................................................................................2.2 Maximum Output Voltage of the R&S UPV Generator ............................................................2.2 Rapid Deactivation of the Outputs ...........................................................................................2.2 Avoiding Hum Loops ................................................................................................................2.3 Help System .............................................................................................................................2.3 Brief Introduction to the R&S UPV Operating Concept................................................................2.4 Windows User Interface and Control Elements .......................................................................2.4 Display......................................................................................................................................2.4 Panels and Display Windows...................................................................................................2.6 Structure of the Panels and Display Windows .........................................................................2.7 Basic Rules of Operation .........................................................................................................2.9 Function Selection and Value Entry.........................................................................................2.9 Help function ..........................................................................................................................2.15 Measurement Functions and Displaying Measurement Results............................................2.16 Numeric display field....................................................................................................2.17 Combi display ..............................................................................................................2.17 Configuring the numeric display field and combi display.............................................2.18 Graphical windows.......................................................................................................2.19 Introduction to Instrument Operation Using Examples .............................................................2.20 Measuring the Frequency Response of an Amplifier, Equalizer, etc .....................................2.20 Step 1: Loading the factory settings ............................................................................2.20 Step 2: Setting the required generator signal ..............................................................2.20 Step 3: Selecting the required measurement ..............................................................2.23 Step 4: Displaying the measurement results – Numeric measurement display ..........2.25 Step 5: Starting the sweep...........................................................................................2.25 Step 6: Displaying the measurement results – Graphical windows.............................2.26 Step 7: Using a relative unit in the graphical window ..................................................2.28 Step 8: Saving the instrument setup............................................................................2.30 Measuring the Harmonic Distortion (THD+N) of a DUT.........................................................2.31 Step 1: Loading the factory settings ............................................................................2.31 Step 2: Setting the required generator signal ..............................................................2.31 Step 3: Selecting the required measurement ..............................................................2.32 Step 4: Displaying the measurement results – Numeric measurement display ..........2.33 Step 5: Displaying the spectrum in the graphical window ...........................................2.33 Step 6: Evaluating the graphical display with markers and cursors ............................2.36 Step 7: Saving the instrument setup............................................................................2.37 Loading Predefined Instrument Setups .......................................................................................2.38 1146.2078.62 I-2.1 E-5 R&S UPV Introduction - Getting Started 2 Getting Started Introduction - Getting Started This chapter describes the manual operation of the R&S UPV audio analyzer. The information in this chapter also largely applies to the R&S UPV66 (which was primarily designed for use in systems) provided that an external monitor, keyboard, and mouse are connected to the instrument. The Audio Analyzer R&S UPV is able to perform virtually all measurements occurring in the audio world, from frequency response measurements through distortion factor and spectral displays to the analysis of digital data streams. Several measurement functions can be carried out and displayed at the same time, whereby in the audio frequency range the measurements are performed as real twochannel functions. The R&S UPV performs all measurements using digital signal processing. Here, analog signals to be measured are first subjected to complex preprocessing on analog measurement modules before they are digitalized and fed to the digital measurement routines. This concept offers numerous advantages, for example: • The measurement methods at the analog and digital interfaces are identical. • The measurement functions are available at both the analog and the digital interfaces. • Operation at the analog and digital interfaces is the same. The many available options mean that the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV can be adapted to perform a wide variety of different tasks. The basic version of the instrument has analog audio interfaces. A number of other measurement functions are also available, but only after the appropriate options have been installed (see the data sheet for details). This chapter, "Getting Started", only describes the functions available in the basic version of the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV. 1146.2078.62 2.1 E-5 Important Information for Measurements R&S UPV Important Information for Measurements Maximum Output Voltage of the R&S UPV Generator The generator of the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV can generate analog output voltages with an RMS of up to 20 V. These levels can damage or even destroy sensitive input circuits. In the Generator Config panel, it is possible to limit the analog output voltage. For measurements on sensitive circuits, it is advisable to set an appropriately low value in the Max Voltage field; this value then applies to all analog output signals, irrespective of the signal shape. The maximum voltage is not exceeded even in the case of changes made using the rotary knob. The section "Function Selection and Value Entry" from page 2.9 onwards and Chapter 3 "Manual Operation" explain how to set these values and change values using the rotary knob. The pulse level of the digital audio signals can be up to 8 V. Although the risk of destruction is generally much smaller than for analog circuits, care must still be taken when making settings for digital circuit energization. Rapid Deactivation of the Outputs In the event of faults, all outputs of the R&S UPV can be deactivated by pressing the Output OFF key. The key affects all audio outputs, i.e. for both analog and digital audio signals. The deactivated lines can only be reactivated by pressing the OUTPUT OFF key again. The status of the key is indicated by an LED. Illumination of the LED means OUTPUT OFF. More detailed information on this key can be found in Chapter 3 in the section "Rapid Deactivation of the Outputs". 1146.2078.62 2.2 E-5 R&S UPV Important Information for Measurements Avoiding Hum Loops It is generally known in audio engineering that analog circuits must always be set up in such a way that hum signal pick-up is avoided. For this reason, it is important that a ground connection (grounding contact) be provided at only one point in the entire circuit. Both the generator and the analyzer are configured as floating devices in order to prevent an additional, inadvertent ground connection via the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV. The two Common fields of the Generator Config and Analyzer Config panels are factory-set to Float. There are, however, some applications where the audio circuit to be tested is set up without any ground connection at all. It may be necessary to create a defined ground connection especially if hum pick-up is suspected. This can be done at the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV by switching the Common field to Ground for either the generator or the analyzer (depending on the application). More detailed information on how to make these settings can be found in this chapter in the section "Function Selection and Value Entry" from page 2.9 onwards and in Chapter 3 "Manual Operation". Help System The Audio Analyzer R&S UPV has a context-sensitive help system. If you have a question while operating the instrument, pressing the HELP key opens a help page containing information on the currently highlighted parameter field. From here it is possible to move to other help pages using the contents list, the index, scroll arrows and page-internal links. More detailed information on this key can be found in Chapter 3 in the section "Help System". 1146.2078.62 2.3 E-5 Brief Introduction to the R&S UPV Operating Concept R&S UPV Brief Introduction to the R&S UPV Operating Concept Windows User Interface and Control Elements To provide the user with a familiar environment, operation is largely based on the Windows® user interfaces. All panels, entry windows, etc are made up of known elements. Operation follows the same basic rules which apply to other Windows® programs in use today. It is assumed that the user is familiar with these basic rules. This information is therefore not given in detail in this manual. The R&S UPV can be operated via the front panel. Additional peripherals such as a mouse and keyboard can be connected but are not essential requirements. After being switched on, the instrument is in the same state as it was before it was switched off. This applies to all setting parameters of the R&S UPV, including those not currently displayed on the screen. The instrument is operated using function keys with permanently assigned functions, softkeys with functions which vary according to the application, the rotary knob with integrated entry function, and the display screen via which the panels are operated. Operation using an external keyboard and mouse is also possible; this is explained in Chapter 3 "Manual Operation". Selection frames or the highlighting of an entry field (dark background) indicate the current entry focus. Entries can be made in the element with entry focus. Display The display is the central element for operating the R&S UPV. Both the instrument settings in the various panels, and the measurement results are displayed here. To make the various functions of the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV easier to operate, they are organized in a series of panels. The measurement results can be displayed as digital numeric values, data lists, in analog bargraphs or in result graphics. The user can freely choose the number of panels and the number of graphical windows to be shown in the display. The size of the windows can be changed within wide limits, whereby the font size, scaling and so on are adapted automatically (depending on the selected window). Panels and display windows can be activated by pressing the WINBAR key. 5 display windows (or "screens") are provided so that the wealth of information can be better organized. The direction keys 1146.2078.62 are used to toggle between the individual screens. 2.4 E-5 R&S UPV Brief Introduction to the R&S UPV Operating Concept Panel Menu bar Numeric display Graphical window "Hidden" Panels WINBAR Softkeys Fig. 2-1 R&S UPV display with main elements One of the two bars (either the softkey bar or the WINBAR) is always displayed at the bottom of the screen. In normal operating mode, the softkey bar is visible; it contains eight buttons which are assigned the functions available in the selection windows of the panels. The softkeys underneath the buttons are labeled with their assigned function; pressing the respective softkey permits rapid selection. If there are more than 8 elements to choose from, the hidden elements in the selection list can be displayed by pressing the last softkey containing the symbol or the first softkey containing the symbol. When the WINBAR key is pressed, the WINBAR appears in place of the softkey bar; this is indicated by "Panel List" in the left-hand corner: The labeled buttons show the names of all panels and graphical windows open in the current screen. Pressing the associated softkey puts the focus on the corresponding panel / graphical window, i.e. it becomes active. At the same time, the system returns to normal operating mode (i.e. the softkey bar). Hidden panels (see "Panels and Display Windows") are also listed in the WINBAR. If a hidden panel is selected, it is redisplayed on the screen with its previously set size and position; it simultaneously receives the focus. 1146.2078.62 2.5 E-5 Brief Introduction to the R&S UPV Operating Concept R&S UPV Panels and Display Windows The Audio Analyzer R&S UPV distinguishes between the following panels and display windows: • Panels used to make function settings • Configuration panels used for configuring how the measurement values are to be displayed • Numeric display fields for displaying the measurement values of the various measurement functions • Combi displays in which numeric measurement values can be supplemented by bargraphs and limit monitoring • Graphical windows in which measurement values are displayed in the form of diagrams • Data lists in which the measurement values are listed in tabular form Panels are opened on the currently displayed screen by activating the menu bar using the MENU key, highlighting the Instruments or DispConfig button with the rotary knob or cursor keys, opening the pulldown menu with the Enter key or rotary-knob click, and then highlighting the desired panel and selecting it with a rotary-knob click. Display windows are selected in the same way, except that they are listed under the Displays button. Each panel and display window is a separate window which can be either closed, opened or hidden. Panels / display windows are open if they are displayed on the currently visible screen. If the window is minimized and moved to the bottom of the screen, it is referred to as being "hidden". In both cases, the panel / window is assigned an entry in the WINBAR at the bottom of the display. Only one window on the screen can be activated at any one time using the softkeys on the WINBAR (active windows are identified by their blue title bar). As soon as a panel / display window is active, it can be moved around on the screen. This is done in the following way: • Press the MODIFY key; the following softkeys then appear on the WINBAR: After selecting the desired direction of movement using the appropriate softkey, the panel can be moved / resized using the rotary knob. The same panel / display window can be displayed in several screens at the same time. The display characteristics can be different for each of the screens; the content is, however, always the same. 1146.2078.62 2.6 E-5 R&S UPV Brief Introduction to the R&S UPV Operating Concept Structure of the Panels and Display Windows The table below shows the panels of the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV as well as the main settings that can be made in these panels (a detailed list of all panels together with the most important setting parameters can be found at the end of Chapter 3 "Manual Operation"): Panels which can be selected via the Instruments menu bar button: Generator Config • • • Selection of instrument (analog or digital interfaces) Configuration of channels and bandwidths Reference values Generator Function • • • • Selection of test signals Sweep function Frequency and level settings Filter and equalizer Analyzer Config • • • Selection of instrument (analog or digital interfaces) Configuration of channels and measurement bandwidth Start and trigger conditions Analyzer Function • • • • • • • • • Selection of measurement functions Measurement speed and accuracy Activation of filter and equalizer Activation of Post-FFT Selection and settings for level monitor Selection and settings for input monitor Selection and settings for frequency, phase, group delay measurement Selection and settings for FFT monitor Selection and settings for waveform monitor Filter • Definition of filter properties Auxiliaries • • • • Settings for integrated loudspeaker and connected headphones Settings for the R&S UPV-U2 option (BNC audio monitoring outputs) Settings for auxiliary analog output Settings for trigger input and trigger output Switcher Panel • Operation of one or more Audio Switchers R&S UPZ Protocol Generator • Settings for the Digital Audio Protocol R&S UPV-K21 1146.2078.62 2.7 E-5 Brief Introduction to the R&S UPV Operating Concept R&S UPV Panels which can be selected via the DispConfig menu bar button: Function Config Level Monitor Config Input Config Freq Phase Config These four panels contain settings for displaying measurement values • in the numeric display fields • in the associated combi displays • and settings for limits, minimum values and maximum values Sweep Graph Config FFT Graph Config Waveform Config Bargraph Config Up to four of each of these panels are available; they contain settings for displaying measurement values in the graphical windows, e.g. • one or two-channel display • units, scaling, gridlines, etc • evaluation of minimum values and maximum values • entry of limit curves • settings for cursors and markers The measurement results of the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV are shown in the following display windows (a detailed list of all panels together with the most important setting parameters can be found at the end of Chapter 3 "Manual Operation"): Numeric Display • • • Display of measurement results for measurement function selected in Analyzer Function panel Display of measurement results for level monitor and/or input monitor selected in Analyzer Function panel Frequency measurement results, or frequency measurement result and phase / group delay measurement result Funct Ch1…2 Lev Mon Ch1…2 Input Ch1…2 Freq Ch1 Freq / Phase These combi displays are extensions to the numeric measurement displays; they show the respective numeric value plus the following additional features: • Analog bargraphs • Limits • Minimum and maximum values Sweep Graph 1…4 FFT Graph 1…2 Waveform Bargraph 1…2 • Dig Analyzer Protocol • 1146.2078.62 • • Up to four of each of these display windows can be opened (depending on the window type) in order to display the scans of the different measurements Graphical display shows one or two channels The measurement results are displayed in the way defined in the associated configuration panel The analyzed data of the digital audio protocol (R&S UPV-K21 option) is displayed here 2.8 E-5 R&S UPV Brief Introduction to the R&S UPV Operating Concept Basic Rules of Operation The following basic rules are intended to simplify operation of the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV: • Operating sequence in the panels: top to bottom Changes to parameters of individual menu items may affect the selection or value range of menu items which are usually located further down (they affect the selection or value range in fields located higher up in only a few exceptional cases). • Sequence: generator – analyzer – measurement value display Many setting parameters can be used in other panels. For example, the sweep frequency settings can automatically be adopted as the scaling for the graph. Observing this sequence saves the user having to enter parameters twice. Function Selection and Value Entry All functions and parameters are set in the panels. The rotary wheel is used for navigating inside the panels. Turning the rotary knob clockwise moves the cursor down or to the right. Here the cursor first moves to the right inside a field, then down through the current group, then jumps over to the right-hand column, down again to the end of the group from where the cursor then moves to the left-hand column of the following group, and so on. Alternatively, the cursor keys and can also be used for navigation. Panels can only be operated if they have the focus (indicated by the blue title bar). 1146.2078.62 2.9 E-5 Brief Introduction to the R&S UPV Operating Concept R&S UPV The simplest way of changing from one panel to another in the case of operation via the front panel is using the direction keys . The key switches from panel to panel in the sequence in which the panels were opened. Changing to a different open (or to a hidden) panel is also possible using the WINBAR (see the section "Display" on page 2.4). Before settings can be made in a panel, the relevant parameter field must be highlighted, i.e. it must have the focus. This is indicated by a selection frame around the entry field. The settings are made in the following ways: Highlighting control elements A control element is activated by shifting the focus to this element using the rotary knob. The entry focus is indicated by a blue, green or magenta border. Activating/deactivating functions A tick box is used to activate or deactivate functions. If the tick box is activated (checkmark), the assigned setting is selected / enabled. Toggling functions Radio buttons are used for functions which can be toggled between two settings. A black dot in the appropriate button indicates the selected status. Only one of the two options can be active at any one time. 1146.2078.62 2.10 E-5 R&S UPV Brief Introduction to the R&S UPV Operating Concept Selecting a parameter button opens a selection field. As soon as Actuating the this parameter field has the focus, a list for selecting the available parameters can be opened with a rotary-knob click. The fold-down parameter list is displayed below the selection field. Parameters are selected by highlighting the desired item and confirming with the ENTER key or rotary-knob click. Items in the parameter list are highlighted using the rotary knob, the cursor keys or the keys . The parameter list can be quit without adopting the highlighted parameter by pressing the ESC key. If the list is longer than the displayed window, a scroll bar is available. Alternatively, parameters can also be selected using the softkeys. Note: The contents of the parameter lists are not fixed but vary depending on other settings selected. Numeric value entries Numeric values can be entered or edited in these fields. The following applies: Entries outside the possible value range are not accepted; an audible warning is issued and the entry is changed to its permissible minimum or maximum value. The possible value range is displayed above the softkey bar. 1146.2078.62 2.11 E-5 Brief Introduction to the R&S UPV Operating Concept R&S UPV Value entries in Edit mode When the focus is moved to a numeric entry field, the system enters Edit mode, which is indicated by a green selection frame. To enter the new value, simply begin entering digits using the numeric keypad on the front panel; the old value is deleted automatically when the first key is pressed. The digit to the left of the cursor can be deleted at any time during entry using the UNDO key. If certain digits only are to be changed, position the digit cursor accordingly using the enter the new digits. or cursor key and The numeric entry field is closed with: ENTER The newly entered value is adopted. ESC The old value is retained. Softkeys The selected unit is set and adopted together with the newly entered value. The entered value is set in the hardware as soon as the numeric entry field is closed. Value entries in Direct mode When the focus is moved to a numeric entry field, the system enters Edit mode, which is indicated by a green selection frame. Changing to Direct mode is performed by pressing the ENTER key or with rotary-knob click; the color of the selection frame then changes to magenta. The digit cursor then moves to the first digit to the right of the decimal point or, if there is no decimal point, to the digit at the extreme right. A digit can now be entered using the keypad on the front panel; the digit at the cursor position is replaced. The cursor does not change its position. The digit cursor can be placed at a different position at any and time using the entered at the new position. cursor keys. Digits are then In Direct mode, every setting change is immediately passed on to the hardware and executed. Direct mode can be quit using the ENTER function or the ESC key. 1146.2078.62 2.12 E-5 R&S UPV Brief Introduction to the R&S UPV Operating Concept Rotary-knob entries in Direct mode When the focus is moved to a numeric entry field, the system enters Edit mode, which is indicated by a green selection frame. Changing to Direct mode is performed by pressing the ENTER key or with rotary-knob click; the color of the selection frame then changes to magenta. The digit cursor then moves to the first digit to the right of the decimal point or, if there is no decimal point, to the digit at the extreme right. The highlighted digit can then be changed directly using the rotary knob, whereby the numeric value is "carried over", i.e. transferred to the next digit. The digit cursor can be placed at a different position at any and cursor keys so that other digits time using the can be changed using the rotary knob. This method is ideal for adjustment work as every change has an immediate effect in the hardware. Value entry can be completed with a rotary-knob click, the ENTER key or the ESC key. As an alternative to the rotary knob, the numeric values can also be changed using the and cursor keys. Entering / changing the unit of a value The unit of a numeric value is displayed next to the entry field. When the value is entered, all units available for the respective function are offered on the softkey bar (on more than one level where necessary). The entry can be completed by selecting the unit using a softkey. This is done differently depending on the selected mode: 1146.2078.62 • In Edit mode, the newly entered numeric value is adopted and set together with the selected unit. • In Direct mode, the physical value (number with the previously selected unit) is converted to the newly selected unit and adopted as the new numeric value. 2.13 E-5 Brief Introduction to the R&S UPV Operating Concept R&S UPV Information on using reference values The Audio Analyzer R&S UPV allows reference values to be used when entering various values. These reference values are used as a basis for settings for other parameters. The example below explains these interdependencies: A reference voltage (Ref Voltage) can be set in the Generator Config panel. The actual output voltage is set in the Generator Function panel where the unit is dBr, i.e. it is possible to enter the output voltage in dB relative to this reference value. Alphanumeric entries When the focus is moved to a text entry field, the system enters Edit mode, which is indicated by a green selection frame. If the complete text (e.g. for graph labels) is to be newly entered, simply begin entering characters using the keypad on the front panel; the old text is deleted automatically when the first key is pressed. The keypad on the front panel of the R&S UPV is automatically switched to the mode for entering alphanumeric characters. Text is entered in the same way as on mobile phones: The characters assigned to a key are called up in sequence by repeatedly pressing the key. A different key can be pressed immediately to enter the next character; a brief pause must, however, be made when entering characters assigned to the same key. The space character is assigned to the key, special characters are entered using the decimal-point key and the key is used to toggle between upper and lower-case characters. The character to the left of the cursor can be deleted at any time during entry using the UNDO key. If certain characters only are to be changed, position the cursor accordingly using the or cursor key and enter the new characters (if the position of the cursor is changed before the first character is entered, the old text will not be deleted). The text entry field is closed with: 1146.2078.62 ENTER The newly entered text is adopted. ESC The old text is retained. 2.14 E-5 R&S UPV Brief Introduction to the R&S UPV Operating Concept Display fields Sometimes it is very useful for operators to receive additional information about their settings. Display fields inside the panels are used in such cases. These fields are shown in grey and cannot be accessed. They always contain valid values and therefore always show settings active in the background; the fields are updated as soon as a setting in the associated parameter field is changed. Adopting parameters In many cases, settings are to apply e.g. to both measurement channels or to both traces. Here the R&S UPV provides multi-column panels which allow settings to be transferred from the left-hand to the righthand column without the parameter having to be entered a second time. If the track box has a checkmark, all of the settings within the function group are applicable to both columns. All fields with transferred settings in the right-hand column are shown as display fields. They appear grey and cannot be accessed while the track function is active. If a setting is changed in the associated parameter field in the left-hand column, this change is also shown in the display field in the right-hand column. Help function Information on the possible entries is given at the bottom of the screen above the softkey bar. The units offered in the softkey bar and the limits specified in the "Valid Range" field always refer to the highlighted parameter field. The valid value range is given in the unit currently selected. Entries outside the specified value range are not accepted; an audible warning is issued and the entry is changed to its permissible minimum or maximum value. Note: The specified ranges for value entries always take the current status of the instrument into consideration. They are therefore not constant and depend on the presets already configured for other parameters. Below is an example for entry of the generator output voltage; additional units can be displayed by actuating the button: 1146.2078.62 2.15 E-5 Brief Introduction to the R&S UPV Operating Concept R&S UPV Measurement Functions and Displaying Measurement Results The Audio Analyzer R&S UPV offers various types of measurement windows for displaying the results of the numerous measurement functions. The measurement results can be displayed as digital numeric values, in analog bargraphs, in result graphics or in data lists. The user can open any number of measurement windows on the screen. • What (which measurement function) is measured and how (which measurement method) measurement is performed, is preset in the Analyzer Function panel. • The panels for configuring the measurement value display are used to determine how the measurement results are presented (i.e. which unit, how many digits, etc). A series of panels for the different measurement windows are provided for this purpose. • The results are finally displayed in the various measurement windows. What is measured and how measurement is performed 1146.2078.62 Display type for measurement results 2.16 Display of measurement results E-5 R&S UPV Brief Introduction to the R&S UPV Operating Concept Numeric display field The numeric display field provides a clear overview of the numeric values from various analyzer functions and displays a maximum of 8 numeric value results from the Analyzer Function panel. The individual columns are permanently assigned, from left to right: Column 1: Measurement results from the function which is set in the Function field of the Analyzer Function panel. Column 2: Measurement results for the set Level Monitor function. Column 3: Measurement results for the Input Peak function. Column 4: Display of either the frequency measurement result or, if Freq & Phase or Freq & GrpDel is set, display of the frequency measurement result in the first row and display of the phase or group delay measurement in the second row. Combi display The combi display is used if the numeric value of a measurement result is to be supplemented by analog bargraphs, limit monitoring or the storage of maximum and minimum values. The free selection and free scalability mean that especially important or critical results can be monitored and tracked even when viewing the R&S UPV screen from a relatively long distance. Measured minimum and maximum values Measurement display Bargraph Limit settings 1146.2078.62 2.17 E-5 Brief Introduction to the R&S UPV Operating Concept R&S UPV Opening combi displays The easiest way to open combi displays is to highlight the respective measurement display in the numeric display field (blue selection frame) and to select the display with the ENTER key or rotary-knob click. Configuring the numeric display field and combi display The settings for the individual columns of the numeric display field or for the combi displays are made in the following four configuration panels which can be opened by actuating the DispConfig button in the menu bar: • • • • Funct Config Lev Mon Config Input Config Freq / Phase Config 1146.2078.62 2.18 E-5 R&S UPV Brief Introduction to the R&S UPV Operating Concept Graphical windows The most informative way of displaying measurement results is to use a two-dimensional graph. The Audio Analyzer R&S UPV makes a distinction between the following graphical windows: • • • • Sweep Graph FFT Graph Waveform Bargraph These windows can be set using the associated configuration panels. All graphical displays can be evaluated using horizontal and vertical cursors; markers are used to identify important measurement points. A broad range of softkey control functions can be used to scale graphs, to display sections of graphs, and to perform many other tasks. 1146.2078.62 2.19 E-5 Introduction to Instrument Operation Using Examples R&S UPV Introduction to Instrument Operation Using Examples Measuring the Frequency Response of an Amplifier, Equalizer, etc This example is based on the factory settings of the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV. It explains the changes made in the individual panels to set up the measurement and describes how to graphically display the measurement results. Finally, the example shows how to save the defined measurement setup on the R&S UPV so that it can be used again for other applications. Step 1: Loading the factory settings The easiest way to load the factory settings of the instrument is to press the PRESET key on the front of the R&S UPV. Alternatively, the factory settings can be loaded by opening the menu bar with the MENU key, highlighting the File button with the rotary knob and actuating it with a rotaryknob click, and then highlighting and actuating Preset (Load Default) in the displayed list in the same way. Step 2: Setting the required generator signal The basic settings for configuring the generator are made in the Generator Config panel. The panel must have the focus before it can be operated. This is already the case with the default setup, otherwise press the WINDOW key until the color of the title bar in the desired panel changes to blue. The frequency response is usually measured on both channels; this is already configured in the Channel field. Depending on the DUT, Output Type can be switched to balanced circuitry; various output impedances can then be selected in the field below. If necessary, the required parameter field can be highlighted with the rotary knob; this is then indicated by a selection frame (see the screenshot to the left). A rotary-knob click toggles between the two radio buttons. 1146.2078.62 2.20 E-5 R&S UPV Introduction to Instrument Operation Using Examples Floating output circuitry for the generator (see the section "Avoiding Hum Loops" on page 2.3) and a maximum signal frequency of 22 kHz are normally the right settings to be used. The other settings are also suitable for the majority of applications and do not have to be adjusted unless necessary. This completes the settings in the Generator Config panel. The Generator Function panel must now be activated; once again, press the WINDOW key until the color of the panel's title bar changes to blue. Sinusoidal signals (Sine) are required; this setting is already selected. To be able to measure the frequency response, the sinusoidal signal must be swept in the frequency. A fixed frequency of 1 kHz is preset in the default instrument setup. To activate the sweep, highlight the Sweep Ctrl field by actuating the rotary knob until this field has the blue selection frame (see the screenshot to the left). The fold-down parameter list is opened with a rotaryknob click or by pressing the ENTER key. Use the rotary knob to highlight Auto Sweep and activate this setting with another rotary-knob click or with the ENTER key. The parameter list closes and a number of additional fields appear in which further sweep parameters can be set. 1146.2078.62 2.21 E-5 Introduction to Instrument Operation Using Examples R&S UPV The Next Step field must remain set to Anlr Sync; this setting causes the next sweep step to be triggered as soon as a valid measurement result is available in the analyzer part. This synchronization optimizes the sweep speed. The sweep variable must now be specified in the next field. Frequency is already preset here (as required in this example). No other sweep variable is required; the Z Axis field therefore remains set to Off. The next selection field is used to select the algorithm for advancing through the sweep points. This can be done using a linear or logarithmic step size; the number of individual sweep points (Points) or the step size from point to point (Steps) can be set. This selection field is factory-set to Log Points; this is the usual setting for frequency response measurements. The values for the start and stop frequency of the sweep must be entered in the next two fields. Highlighting the desired field gives it the green selection frame. The required frequency value can now be entered directly using the numeric keypad on the front panel (20 Hz in this example). Pressing the ENTER key adopts the value and adjusts the hardware accordingly. The possible value range is given above the softkey bar. Entries outside the specified value range are not accepted; an audible warning is issued and the entry is changed to its permissible minimum or maximum value. As soon as the value entry field is highlighted, all available units are displayed on the softkey bar; additional hidden units can be shown by actuating the button. Value entry can be completed by actuating the softkey labeled with the desired unit; this is a particularly useful feature if a value is to be changed to a different unit. 1146.2078.62 2.22 E-5 R&S UPV Introduction to Instrument Operation Using Examples The value for the stop frequency is entered in the same way (here 20 kHz). The number of desired sweep points must be entered in the Points field; 30 points are preset here. Up to 1024 points can be selected. 50 points are entered in this example; this generally provides an adequate number of measurement values without making the overall measurement cycle too long. The desired output voltage for the measurement is entered in the Voltage field; once again, the field must be highlighted before the value can be entered. The value range is again displayed above the softkeys and the available units are shown in the softkeys. The remaining fields are not relevant for this example. Configuration of the generator is therefore complete. Step 3: Selecting the required measurement The basic settings for configuring the analyzer are made in the Analyzer Config panel. Once again, the panel must have the focus before it can be operated ( WINDOW key). The frequency response is usually measured on both channels; this is already configured in the Channel field. The setting 2 1 means that both channels have the same settings; the following parameter fields appear once only in the panel but affect both channels. 1146.2078.62 2.23 E-5 Introduction to Instrument Operation Using Examples R&S UPV If necessary, it is possible to toggle between AC and DC coupling using the two radio buttons. The fields for the measurement bandwidth are already preset with the appropriate setting; no prefilter is required here. In this example, the signal to be measured is supplied via the balanced input sockets (Bal setting). The analyzer can also be connected to the generator internally. Floating input circuitry for the analyzer (see the section "Avoiding Hum Loops" on page 2.3) and the autorange function are normally the right settings to be used. The default settings in the following fields are also correct. This completes the settings in the Analyzer Config panel. The following are set in the Analyzer Function panel: • what is measured (which measurement function) and • how measurement is performed (which measurement method) The RMS of the voltage must be measured for the frequency response measurement described here; the required setting (RMS) is already preselected. The measurement time for each individual measurement point is selected in the Meas Time field. The default instrument setting here is Auto which means that the measurement time is automatically adapted to the input frequency, i.e. the measurement cycle speeds up as the frequency increases. This setting can (with just a few exceptions) be used for the majority of applications. If the integrated generator is used for measuring the frequency response (as in this example), the setting Gen Track should be used. The measurement time is then automatically adapted to the frequency generated in the generator. The frequency information from the generator is passed on directly to the analyzer. The analyzer then adjusts its measurement time to precisely one period (or to an integer multiple of one period). The advantage of this method is maximum measurement speed with maximum accuracy. All other parameter fields are not relevant for this example; the settings in the Analyzer Function panel are therefore complete. 1146.2078.62 2.24 E-5 R&S UPV Introduction to Instrument Operation Using Examples Step 4: Displaying the measurement results – Numeric measurement display In the default instrument setup, the measurement display is also already open. numeric If the DUT is correctly connected to the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV, measurement values will already be displayed. The panels for configuring the measurement value display are used to determine how the measurement results are presented (i.e. which unit, how many digits, etc). A series of panels for the different measurement windows are provided for this purpose. The Function Config panel is shown here as an example; the first column of the numeric measurement display is configured in this panel, i.e. the display fields which show the measured level values for the frequency response measurement described here. The panel has two columns; to simplify matters, only Channel 1 is shown here. The unit for the numeric measurement displays is set in the Unit field. The Engineering parameter is used to determine whether the display automatically toggles between KV, mV and V, for example, or whether other unit formats are desired. If the measurement results are to be displayed as relative values, they are referred to the reference value set in the Reference field. Other parameter fields in this panel are used to set limits and to display extreme values. These functions are described in detail in Chapter 3 "Manual Operation" and Chapter 4 "Instrument Functions". Step 5: Starting the sweep Although the analyzer is already supplying measurement results, the status message "Sweep Waiting" above the softkeys indicates that the sweep has not yet been started, although it has been configured in the Generator Function panel. The sweep is started by pressing the START key in the top right-hand part of the R&S UPV front panel. The status message "Sweep Run Cont" informs the user that when this key is pressed the sweep will start and be repeated continuously. 1146.2078.62 2.25 E-5 Introduction to Instrument Operation Using Examples R&S UPV The sweep can be stopped at any time by pressing the STOP CONT key (the status message "Sweep Stopped" is displayed); the sweep continues if the key is pressed again. If the SINGLE key is pressed, the sweep is started once only; "Sweep Terminated" appears in the status field when the sweep cycle has been terminated. Step 6: Displaying the measurement results – Graphical windows The results of a frequency response measurement are usually displayed graphically with the measured output voltage values of the DUT being plotted on the frequency axis. The following settings are required for this: Use a different screen for the graphical display so that Screen 1 is not filled with too many panels. To do this, change to Screen 5 by pressing the SCREEN key; this screen is empty in the default R&S UPV setup. Open the menu bar with the MENU key and open the Sweep Graph 1 Config panel by selecting it in the selection list displayed by actuating the DispConfig button. As explained above, the way in which the measurement results are presented is determined in the configuration panels. Each graphical window has its own configuration panel. The Sweep Graph 1 Config panel required here has two columns; to simplify matters, only Trace A is shown in the example. The associated graphical window can be opened by actuating the Show button in the Display field. The window appears in the same screen so that the effect of the following settings can be observed directly. In each graphical window, one or two traces (Trace A and Trace B) can be plotted on one X-axis. Each trace can consist of a large number of scans. In this example, only one single scan is to be displayed; the Scan field can therefore remain set to Single. 1146.2078.62 2.26 E-5 R&S UPV Introduction to Instrument Operation Using Examples The scans can display the results of the different measurements available in the R&S UPV. For the frequency response measurement, the measurement results for the measurement function selected in the Function field in the Analyzer Function panel (here the RMS measurement) must be displayed on a graph. For Trace A, the Source field is therefore set to the function result of measuring channel 1 (this is already preset in the default setup). The Alive setting means that the results are displayed continuously; the Hold setting "freezes" the traces. The units to be used for the measurement values on the Y-axis are set in the next section. If the unit used in the numeric display window is also to be used in the graphical window, the Unit Fnct Track tick box must be activated. If this is not the case, a unit can be selected from the parameter list next to the tick box. The Engineering parameter is used to determine whether the display automatically toggles between KV, mV and V, for example, or whether other unit formats are desired. All the other default instrument settings are correct and allow a result to be displayed immediately in the form of a graph. If the sweep is started with the START or SINGLE key, the scan appears in the graphical window. The scaling will probably need to be adjusted. Actuating the Exec button in the line Autoscale rescales the graph on the basis of the measured minimum and maximum values so that the entire trace fits in the graphical window. The end values for the Y-axis can, however, also be entered in the two fields Top and Bottom. The default R&S UPV settings for the X-axis are also mostly correct for this example: 1146.2078.62 2.27 E-5 Introduction to Instrument Operation Using Examples R&S UPV By selecting a frequency sweep in the Generator Function panel, the X-axis is automatically defined as the frequency axis with the unit Hz. If Auto is set in the Scaling field, the start and stop frequency of the sweep defined in the Generator Function panel is automatically used as the upper and lower end value for the X-axis. The Lin setting in the Spacing field is unsuitable for this example. Since a sweep with logarithmic step size has been selected for this measurement, the X-axis should also be subdivided logarithmically. This setting can be changed quickly with a rotary-knob click. Step 7: Using a relative unit in the graphical window The settings so far made allow the frequency response of the DUT to be displayed graphically but not in a way that conforms to standards. In the case of frequency response measurement, the relevant standards stipulate that the deviations of the output voltage must be plotted over frequency, whereby the output voltage of the DUT at the reference frequency 1 kHz (for analog measurements) is used as the reference level. The following settings in the Sweep Graph 1 Config panels are used to adapt the graph for this measurement example: A default reference value of 1 V is set in the Reference field. This value must be replaced by the output voltage value of the DUT measured with the reference frequency of 1 kHz. The R&S UPV offers a very simple way of doing this: Open the parameter list in the Reference field and select the Ref 1000 Hz setting. With this setting, the value measured at this frequency is determined (if necessary by means of interpolation between the measurement values at the two adjacent frequencies) and used as the reference value. 1146.2078.62 2.28 E-5 R&S UPV Introduction to Instrument Operation Using Examples All that remains is to select the unit dBr in the Unit Fnct Track field. All measurement values are then displayed in dB relative to the reference value selected above. This satisfies the standards defining frequency response measurement. The Y-axis must now be scaled according requirement, e.g. from +20 dBr to -20 dBr. to If the measurement result of the second channel has been selected for Trace B, the graphical display for the measured frequency response may look like the example shown opposite. 1146.2078.62 2.29 E-5 Introduction to Instrument Operation Using Examples R&S UPV Step 8: Saving the instrument setup Pressing the SAVE key opens the window for saving files. The desired file name can now be entered using the keypad on the front panel. The keypad on the front panel of the R&S UPV is automatically switched to the mode for entering alphanumeric characters. Text is entered in the same way as on mobile phones: The characters assigned to a key are called up in sequence by repeatedly pressing the key. A different key can be pressed immediately to enter the next character; a brief pause must, however, be made when entering characters assigned to the same key. The file extension is assigned automatically once the file name has been entered (here .SET); it is advisable to use this automatic assignment function as it prevents entry errors. If this instrument setup is to be used again at a later date, simply press the LOAD key to reload the setup in the file window. 1146.2078.62 2.30 E-5 R&S UPV Introduction to Instrument Operation Using Examples Measuring the Harmonic Distortion (THD+N) of a DUT This example is also based on the factory settings of the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV. However, only the settings in the individual panels which differ from the settings in the previous example are explained. Step 1: Loading the factory settings The easiest way to load the factory settings of the instrument is to press the PRESET key on the front of the R&S UPV. Alternatively, the default setup can also be loaded via the menu bar. Step 2: Setting the required generator signal In the Generator Config panel, the basic settings for configuring the generator in this example are the same as those set for the frequency response measurement described in the previous section. Depending on the DUT, Output Type may have to be switched to balanced circuitry. The Generator Function panel must now be activated; once again, press the WINDOW key until the color of the panel's title bar changes to blue. Sinusoidal signals (Sine) are required; this setting is already selected. The harmonic distortion is often only specified for the reference frequency 1 kHz (for analog applications). Fixed frequencies are therefore used for measurement; as a result, Sweep Ctrl must remain set to Off. 1146.2078.62 2.31 E-5 Introduction to Instrument Operation Using Examples R&S UPV The frequency 1 kHz is already preset in the default instrument setup. Only the output level required for the measurement may have to be adjusted (in the Voltage field). The remaining fields are not relevant for this example. Configuration of the generator is therefore complete. Step 3: Selecting the required measurement The basic settings for configuring the analyzer are again made in the Analyzer Config panel. These settings are made in the same way as shown in the previous example. The Analyzer Function panel must now be activated; once again, press the WINDOW key until the color of the panel's title bar changes to blue. The measurement function and measurement method are set in this panel. The measurement function is selected first; the folddown parameter list is opened with a rotary-knob click or by pressing the ENTER key. Use the rotary knob to highlight THD+D & SINAD and activate this setting with another rotary-knob click or with the ENTER key. The parameter list is then closed again. 1146.2078.62 2.32 E-5 R&S UPV Introduction to Instrument Operation Using Examples In the next field Meas Mode, various modes for distortion factor measurement can be selected; the presetting THD+N is correct for this example. Dynamic Mode determines the maximum dynamic response for this measurement: fast measurement with restricted dynamic response or maximum dynamic response with a slightly longer measurement time are the two possible options. With the THD+N measurement, the fundamental of the signal to be measured is suppressed using a notch filter. The R&S UPV can automatically determine the fundamental from the spectrum and adjust the notch filter to it (Fundamental Auto). Filter and Equalizer are only required in exceptional cases. The calculation for harmonics and noise components can if necessary be restricted to within band limits which can be entered in the two fields Freq Lim Low and Freq Lim Upp. All other parameter fields are not relevant for this example; the settings in the Analyzer Function panel are therefore complete. Step 4: Displaying the measurement results – Numeric measurement display In the default instrument setup, measurement display is already open. the numeric If the DUT is correctly connected to the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV, the measurement values for the harmonic distortion can be read off in the first column. In the default setup, THD+N values are given in dB; if a display in % is desired, this unit can be changed in the Function Config panel. Step 5: Displaying the spectrum in the graphical window Display of the numeric value alone is sufficient for the majority of harmonic distortion measurements. Here, however, the spectral composition of the output signal at the DUT is also to be analyzed. With the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV, it is possible to follow up all distortion measurements with an FFT analysis. The necessary settings for this are explained in the following section: 1146.2078.62 2.33 E-5 Introduction to Instrument Operation Using Examples R&S UPV In the Analyzer Function panel already used for configuring the THD+N measurement, an FFT analysis to be performed following the measurement can be set after the actual measurement function has been selected. To do this, highlight the Post FFT tick box with the rotary knob and activate it with a rotary-knob click. The size of the FFT can be adjusted if necessary. To display the results of the FFT analysis graphically, first change to Screen 5 by pressing the SCREEN key; this screen is empty in the default R&S UPV setup. Open the menu bar with the MENU key and open the FFT Graph 1 Config panel by selecting it in the selection list displayed by actuating the DispConfig button. As explained in the previous example, the way in which the measurement results are presented is determined in the configuration panels. Each graphical window has its own configuration panel. The FFT Graph 1 Config panel required here has two columns; to simplify matters, only Trace A is shown in the example. The associated graphical window can be opened by actuating the Show button in the Display field. The window appears in the same screen so that the effect of the following settings can be observed directly. 1146.2078.62 2.34 E-5 R&S UPV Introduction to Instrument Operation Using Examples In each FFT window, one or two traces (Trace A and Trace B) can be plotted on the frequency axis. In this example, the level measurement results of the FFT analysis are to be displayed on a graph. For Trace A, the Source field is therefore set to FFT Level Ch1 (this is already preset in the default setup). The Alive setting means that the results are displayed continuously; the Hold setting "freezes" the traces. The settings for unit, Y-axis scaling and grid are already preset in the default setup; a result should therefore be visible. If necessary, these settings must be adjusted. The settings for the X-axis are also mostly correct for this example; they were explained in the previous example. Note: In the Analyzer Function panel, you can also use the Show button to open the graphical window for Post FFT. However, this displays the window in the same screen, without opening the associated configuration panel. The spectral display of the output signal with its harmonics may now look like the example shown opposite. 1146.2078.62 2.35 E-5 Introduction to Instrument Operation Using Examples R&S UPV Step 6: Evaluating the graphical display with markers and cursors All graphical displays can be evaluated using horizontal and vertical cursors; the X and Y-values shown in the display fields associated with the cursors are always current values. Markers are used to identify important measurement points. The cursors and markers can only be operated using the softkey bar; the required softkeys are displayed at the bottom of the screen as soon as the graphical window has the focus. The softkeys are arranged in several levels; the lower levels are accessed by actuating the respective button. Actuating the Back button redisplays the higher level. Setting markers: Actuating the Marker button displays the marker softkeys: The trace in which markers are to be set (Trace A in this example) must first be selected using the softkey. The next softkey level appears simultaneously: The Track to Max button is used to set a marker at the maximum value of the curve, i.e. the fundamental in this example THD+N measurement. The Harmonics button is used to mark the harmonics of the fundamental indicated by the marker. Actuating the Back softkey twice redisplays the first softkey level. Using cursors: Actuating the Cursor button displays the cursor softkeys: The Audio Analyzer R&S UPV uses two cursors which are identified by the and symbols. These symbols are used to mark the measured points in the graph (see the example graph below). Only one cursor is active and can be moved in the graph at any one time. The active cursor is displayed with a solid line; the inactive cursor is displayed with a broken line. 1146.2078.62 2.36 E-5 R&S UPV Introduction to Instrument Operation Using Examples The <-> button or a rotary-knob click is used to toggle between the and -cursor. If, for example, the cursor was activated with the -Cursor button, the following softkeys appear: Actuating the Vert A button activates a vertical cursor on Trace A; this cursor can then be moved using the rotary knob. The step size with which the cursor is moved can be set using further softkeys. The Movement button opens the next softkey level where various step sizes for moving the cursor are offered. The currently selected step size is indicated in brackets in the second label line of the Movement button. With activated markers and a cursor, the graphical display of the output signal with its harmonics may look like the example shown opposite. Step 7: Saving the instrument setup This example can also be saved as an instrument setup. Pressing the SAVE key opens the file window. The file is then saved in the way described in the previous example. 1146.2078.62 2.37 E-5 Loading Predefined Instrument Setups R&S UPV Loading Predefined Instrument Setups To make initial measurements easier for new users, example setups for the basic measurements required in audio engineering are supplied with every Audio Analyzer R&S UPV. These setups allow the instrument to be used almost immediately. The setup files are available for the different domains (analog or digital) of the generator and analyzer. They are stored in the AA to DD subdirectories of the D:\UPV\Applications directory; the generator domain is listed first followed by the analyzer domain. The file name indicates the respective application. Many of these example measurements (essentially those at the analog interfaces) can be performed using the basic version of the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV. The R&S UPV-B2 option or the R&S UPV-B20 option (digital audio interfaces) is required for all measurements at the digital interfaces. The predefined instrument setups can be loaded in the following way: The quickest way to load setups is to open the menu bar with the MENU key, highlight the File button with the rotary knob and actuate it with a rotary-knob click. The item Load Example Setup in the folddown list that then appears must then be highlighted and actuated in the same way. The file window is opened already displaying the directory in which the example measurements can be selected. Alternatively, the file window used to select the example measurements can also be opened using the LOAD key on the front of the R&S UPV; in this case, however, the appropriate directories must be selected manually. All of the setups listed here use the same basic settings. Basic settings for analog inputs/outputs: • Both channels of the generator and analyzer are active; the balanced XLR connections with minimum generator impedance and maximum analyzer impedance are used. • All inputs/outputs are floating; the autorange function is activated. • Frequency sweeps are usually performed logarithmically from 20 Hz to 20 kHz; the appropriate graphical windows are open on the screen; the X-axis is scaled automatically in the associated configuration panels; the Y-axis is permanently set to standard values. • Voltages are mostly given in volts; the generator output voltage is set to 0.1 V; distortion and intermodulation values are given in dB. 1146.2078.62 2.38 E-5 R&S UPV Loading Predefined Instrument Setups Basic settings for digital inputs/outputs: • Both channels are active; the generator generates 24 bit words; the analyzer analyzes 24 audio bits. The sampling frequency is set to 48 kHz; the Professional format to AES 3 is used. The digital pulse amplitude of the generator is 1 V at the BNC outputs; this corresponds to 4 V at the XLR sockets. • Levels are mostly given in dBFS; audio signals are usually generated at a level of –20 dBFS. Users can, of course, adapt the used basic settings to their own specific measurement tasks at any time. To do this, the respective setup must be loaded and the appropriate changes are then made in the panels. The setup can then be saved again. The application setups are also updated when new R&S UPV firmware is installed. Modified setups should therefore be saved under a different file name. Users are also free to create new directories for their customized setups. 1146.2078.62 2.39 E-5 R&S UPV Contents - Manual Operation Contents - Chapter 3 "Manual Operation" 3 Manual Operation.........................................................................................................................3.1 Introduction - Manual Operation.....................................................................................................3.1 Functional Organization of the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV ...........................................................3.2 Instrument Concept..................................................................................................................3.2 Generators ...............................................................................................................................3.2 Analyzers..................................................................................................................................3.4 General Information on Operation..................................................................................................3.9 Windows User Interface ...........................................................................................................3.9 Using the Rotary Knob .............................................................................................................3.9 Operation Using the Mouse ...................................................................................................3.10 Operation Using an External PC Keyboard ...........................................................................3.11 Display.............................................................................................................................................3.12 Display and Screens ..............................................................................................................3.12 WINBAR and Softkeys ...........................................................................................................3.14 Moving and Resizing Panels and Graphical Windows ..........................................................3.16 Status Displays and Messages ..............................................................................................3.19 Panels ..............................................................................................................................................3.21 Panel and Window Types ......................................................................................................3.21 Opening, Operating, Hiding and Closing Panels ...................................................................3.21 Panel Structure ......................................................................................................................3.23 Navigating in the Panels ........................................................................................................3.27 Settings on the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV ...................................................................................3.28 Settings in the Panels ....................................................................................................................3.29 Focus......................................................................................................................................3.29 Changing the Instrument........................................................................................................3.30 Changing Functions ...............................................................................................................3.30 Hiding Parameter Fields.........................................................................................................3.31 Highlighting Control Elements................................................................................................3.32 Activating/Deactivating Functions – Tick boxes.....................................................................3.32 Toggling Functions – Radio Buttons ......................................................................................3.33 Selecting a Parameter – Selection Fields ..............................................................................3.34 Numeric Entries – Numeric Entry Fields ................................................................................3.35 Alphanumeric Entries – Text Entry Fields..............................................................................3.42 Display Fields .........................................................................................................................3.43 Adopting Parameters – Track Box .........................................................................................3.44 Help Functions .......................................................................................................................3.44 Completing Settings ...............................................................................................................3.45 Entries During Measurement / Data Output...........................................................................3.46 1146.2078.62 I-3.1 E-5 Contents - Manual Operation R&S UPV Measurement Displays ..................................................................................................................3.47 Measurement Functions and Displaying Measurement Results............................................3.47 Numeric Display Field ............................................................................................................3.48 Combi Display ........................................................................................................................3.50 Graphical Windows ................................................................................................................3.56 Evaluating Graphical Displays with Cursors and Markers .....................................................3.69 Data Lists ...............................................................................................................................3.82 Settings in the Menu Bar ...............................................................................................................3.86 Settings in the Toolbar ..................................................................................................................3.91 Settings in the Operating System.................................................................................................3.94 Auxiliaries Panel.............................................................................................................................3.94 Audio Monitor Function ..........................................................................................................3.94 Auxiliary Analog Output..........................................................................................................3.96 Trigger Input, Trigger Output .................................................................................................3.97 Rapid Deactivation of the Outputs ...............................................................................................3.98 Help System ....................................................................................................................................3.99 Operating Help .......................................................................................................................3.99 Help Text Language.............................................................................................................3.100 File Management ..........................................................................................................................3.102 Selecting the File Select Window.........................................................................................3.103 Integrated File Select Window .............................................................................................3.104 File Manager ........................................................................................................................3.105 Loading and Saving Instrument Settings .............................................................................3.106 List of File Extensions Used.................................................................................................3.107 Manual Remote Operation...........................................................................................................3.109 Units...............................................................................................................................................3.110 Units in Measurement Result Displays ................................................................................3.111 Units for Value Entries .........................................................................................................3.115 Overview of Keys..........................................................................................................................3.118 Overview of Panels and Measurement Displays (Graphical Windows)..................................3.122 Overview of Status Messages.....................................................................................................3.126 1146.2078.62 I-3.2 E-5 R&S UPV Introduction - Manual Operation 3 Manual Operation Introduction - Manual Operation The R&S UPV audio analyzer is available in two models. The R&S UPV standard model and the R&S UPV66, which is specially designed for use in systems. The R&S UPV66 has no display, no front panel control elements, and no CD/DVD drive. Apart from the omission of front-panel operation, the R&S UPV66 model has largely the same functions as the standard model. This manual therefore describes both instruments in parallel, and any differences are indicated at the appropriate points in the text. The Audio Analyzer R&S UPV uses the WindowsXP® operating system. The instrument is therefore operated in largely the same way as other Windows® applications. All panels and display windows have the standard Windows® format and are operated in the same way. The rotary knob, keys and softkeys, or alternatively an external keyboard and/or mouse, allow direct and convenient access to entries and settings. The clearly organized display shows the current state of the audio analyzer. The R&S UPV model can be fully operated using the control elements on the front panel; additional peripherals such as a mouse and keyboard are not essential requirements. They can, however, be connected so that the user is free to decide how he would like to operate the R&S UPV. Mixed operation is also possible. If the R&S UPV66 model is to be operated manually, you need to connect an external screen, a mouse, and a PC keyboard. The section "Overview of Keys" at the end of this chapter provides the keys and key combinations on a PC keyboard that correpond to the front-panel keys available with the R&S UPV model. For further information on operation by means of mouse and keyboard, refer to the sections "Operation Using the Mouse" and "Operation Using an External PC Keyboard" in this chapter. The use of the toolbar simplifies the operation of both models when using the mouse. See the section "Settings in the Toolbar" in this chapter. Numerous online help functions assist the user in making settings. After being switched on, the instrument is in the same state as it was before it was switched off. This applies to all setting parameters of the R&S UPV, including those not currently displayed on the screen. The following chapter describes manual operation of the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV. This includes a description of the screen displays, how to operate the panels and how to set parameters. Each of the setting descriptions is accompanied by a table explaining how the different functions are performed via the front panel and using an external PC keyboard or mouse. An overview of the keys, panels and display windows can be found at the end of this chapter. The functions of the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV are described in detail in Chapter 4. Chapter 2 contains a description of the general operating concept and a brief introduction in which initial measurements are configured step by step. Remote control of the instrument is described in Chapters 5, 6 and 7. 1146.2078.62 3.1 E-5 Functional Organization of the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV R&S UPV Functional Organization of the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV Instrument Concept The Audio Analyzer R&S UPV combines the following components in a single housing: • generators with analog and (with the R&S UPV-B2 and -B20 options) digital audio interfaces for generating the various test signals • analyzers with analog and (with the R&S UPV-B2 and -B20 options) digital audio interfaces for comprehensive measuring possibilities and • a computer (PC) with the WindowsXP® operating system for controlling and operating the entire instrument and with connections for PC peripherals and LAN Generators Universal generator The universal generator consists of signal processors and generates the various test signals from sinusoidal tones through intermodulation test signals (two-tone signals) to noise signals and multitones. Following appropriate conversion, these signal are made available at the analog outputs. Using the R&S UPV-B2 and -B20 options, they can also be output as digital data streams in various formats at the AES/EBU and SPDIF interfaces and at optical interfaces. The R&S UPV-B4x options, which can be installed in the expansion slots at the rear of the instrument, provide further interfaces for outputting the test signals. By using the R&S UPV-B2 and -K21 options, you can also generate additional digital data such as channel status data as well as validity and parity bits. By using the R&S UPV-B20 and -K22 options, the universal generator can also be used to generate impairment signals for applying jitter or common-mode interference to the DUT connected to the AES/EBU and SPDIF interfaces. All test signals can be output on one or two channels. With the R&S UPV-B2 (and R&S UPV-B20) option, two different signals are also available at the digital outputs. The hardware option R&S UPV-B3 provides the R&S UPV with a second analog output amplifier. This allows different signals to be output on the two analog output channels. Low-distortion generator The low-distortion generator (R&S UPV-B1 option) is required for all applications where extremely pure analog signals are necessary or an extended frequency range up to 185 kHz is needed. Its intrinsic distortion is considerably less than the already excellent values for the universal generator. 1146.2078.62 3.2 E-5 R&S UPV Functional Organization of the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV Function blocks and their assignment to the panels The diagram below shows the function blocks of the generators in the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV: Playback Filter DSP Gen Filter / Equalizer Extend. Interface Slot 1 Digital Output Extension 1 Extend. Interface Slot 2 Digital Output Extension 2 Digital Audio Board AES / SPDIF Output internal (Jitter, Common) D standard circuits optional circuits A Analog Output Low Dist Gen The generators of the R&S UPV are operated in two steps: In the first step, the following settings are made in the Generator Config panel: the audio interfaces at which the test signals are to be output the channels which are to be active maximum level and reference values etc Output as impairment test signals is also set here. 1146.2078.62 3.3 E-5 Functional Organization of the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV R&S UPV In the second step, the following settings are made in the Generator Function panel: type of test signal output level frequencies etc Analyzers Basic concept of the analyzers The R&S UPV performs all measurements using digital signal processing. Here, analog signals to be measured are first subjected to complex 2-channel analog preprocessing on analog measurement modules before they are digitalized and fed to the digital measurement routines. This concept has the following advantages: • All audio measurement functions are available at both the analog and the digital interfaces. • The measurement methods at the analog and digital interfaces are identical. • Operation at the analog and digital interfaces is always the same. • The analog preprocessing makes it possible to achieve a higher dynamic response than that provided by the internally used 24-bit converter. • The R&S UPV can also perform the complex measurement functions simultaneously on both channels; this alone halves the time required for stereo measurements. • Several measurement functions, e.g. level measurement, FFT analysis, waveform analysis, etc, are calculated simultaneously on separate signal processors and can therefore be displayed at the same time without a delay. • The digital measurement routines can continuously adapt their speed to the current input frequency and thus achieve high measurement speeds. • Since the filters are also digital, an almost infinite number of filters is available and can also be used for measurements at analog interfaces. With the R&S UPV-B2 (and R&S UPV-B20) option, digital audio data streams can also be measured at the AES/EBU and SPDIF interfaces. The R&S UPV-B4x options, which can be installed in the expansion slots at the rear of the instrument, provide further interfaces for analyzing signals in other formats. 1146.2078.62 3.4 E-5 R&S UPV Functional Organization of the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV Function blocks and measurement levels The analyzer part of the R&S UPV offers a large range of measurement options which are organized in various measurement levels. The measurement results of these levels can also be displayed simultaneously. The unfiltered input signal is analyzed in the input level. The peak level at the input connectors is analyzed here. The pre-filter, which can be looped into the signal path before all other analyses, is located in front of the monitor level. Here you can analyze the RMS value or the DC voltage component of the signal to be tested. Following any additional filtering using up to 3 filters, detailed analysis is initiated in the function level. All the usual analysis tools for measuring linear and non-linear distortion, interferences etc can be found here. The analysis in the time domain (waveform) as well as the FFT analysis with extreme dynamic response and frequency resolution take place here. Moreover, it is possible to record input signals to the hard disk in order to analyze them at some point later. The measurement values for frequency and phase or group delay can be displayed in a different measurement window parallel to the structure described above. The audio monitoring output (integrated loudspeaker or headphones connection) can be activated on each of the three levels and thus permits audio monitoring of analog or digital input signals both directly at the input and in the different analysis levels. The generator signal can also be switched to the loudspeaker / headphones. With the R&S UPV-U2 option, the signals of the audio monitoring output can also be output at the BNC connectors on the rear panel of the instrument. By using the R&S UPV-B2 and -K21, you can also analyze additional digital data such as channel status data as well as validity and parity bits. With the R&S UPV-B2 and -K22 options, it is also possible to analyze the digital interface parameters of DUTs (e.g. jitter, pulse amplitude, sampling frequency, etc) at the AES/EBU and SPDIF interfaces. The results of these different measurement functions can be displayed in various ways in the measurement windows. The type of display, the units used, scaling, etc can be set differently for each measurement function in the associated panels. 1146.2078.62 3.5 E-5 Functional Organization of the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV R&S UPV The diagram below shows the function blocks and the analysis levels of the R&S UPV analyzer part: Input Display Digital Input Extension 1 Extend. Interface Slot 1 Digital Input Extension 2 Extend. Interface Slot 2 AES / SPDIF Input Digital Audio Board Level Monitor Pre Filter Impairment Measurements (Jitter, Common Mode) Analog Input FFT 0...1 Analog PreProcess. A Post FFT D Filter selectable bandwidth 0...3 Meas. Funct. : : : : Freq. Phase GrpDel standard circuits optional circuits D A internal UPV Generator The analyzer part of the R&S UPV is also operated in two steps: Operation begins in the Analyzer Config panel with the selection of: analog or digital input connectors number of channels AC or DC coupling measurement bandwidth and a number of other parameters 1146.2078.62 3.6 E-5 R&S UPV Functional Organization of the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV Following this step, the measurements at the various analysis levels of the R&S UPV are set in the Analyzer Function panel. The measurements are set in the order of their importance: measurements in the function level, e.g. distortion measurements (possibly with Post-FFT enabled) settings in the monitor level, e.g. DC measurement display of the peak value in the input level display of frequency, phase / group delay In addition, the Waveform and, if necessary, Protocol Analysis functions can be switched on and off in this panel. 1146.2078.62 3.7 E-5 Functional Organization of the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV R&S UPV If audio monitoring using the integrated loudspeaker or with headphones is required, this is set in the Auxiliaries panel. The following settings can be made in other panels: the way in which the measurement results are to be displayed (numerically or graphically) scaling limit monitoring minimum and/or maximum values and many other parameters 1146.2078.62 3.8 E-5 R&S UPV General Information on Operation General Information on Operation Windows User Interface To provide the user with a familiar environment, operation is largely based on the Windows® user interfaces. All panels, entry windows, etc are made up of known elements, for example: Selection fields with parameter lists Tick boxes Radio buttons Entry fields A blue, green or magenta selection frame or the highlighting of an entry field (dark background) indicates the current entry focus. Entries can be made in the element with entry focus. Operation follows the same basic rules which apply to other Windows® programs in use today. It is assumed that the user is familiar with these basic rules. This information is therefore not given in detail in this manual. Using the Rotary Knob Operation is possible using the front-panel keys, an external keyboard and/or a mouse. However, most of the settings can be made with the rotary knob: • Turning the rotary knob shifts the entry focus to the desired element. • Pressing the rotary knob (rotary-knob click) opens the parameter list in the selection fields; a parameter can be selected from the list by again turning and then clicking with the rotary knob. • Tick boxes are activated/deactivated by clicking with the rotary knob. • The individual radio buttons are selected by turning the rotary knob; they are toggled by clicking with the rotary knob. • In the entry fields, the numeric values can be changed directly (with immediate effect on the setting) or first edited and then adopted by clicking again with the rotary knob. 1146.2078.62 3.9 E-5 General Information on Operation R&S UPV Operation Using the Mouse Similar to other Windows® programs, the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV can also be operated using a mouse. To permit this, a commercially available mouse (not supplied with the instrument) is connected to one of the 4 USB interfaces at the front or rear of the instrument (see Chapter 1, "Connecting a Mouse", page 1.26). The mouse makes it easier to move and resize the panels and graphical windows on the screen and provides alternative operating modes. It allows easy operation of Windows®. The Audio Analyzer R&S UPV also features a special tool bar for mouse operation. You can define whether the tool bar should always be visible at the top edge of the screen or whether it should appear at the right-hand edge of the screen as soon as you move the mouse pointer there. This tool bar contains a number of icons for calling up frequently used functions. The functions of the mouse correspond to the following front-panel functions: Mouse Left-click Front panel ENTER key, rotary-knob click Function Activates selection fields Selects parameters Activates/deactivates tick boxes Toggles radio buttons Quits the Edit mode Move mouse pointer to lefthand edge of screen Turning mouse wheel MENU key Shows the menu bar Turning rotary knob Navigation in panels, parameter lists, etc Changes numeric values Pressing mouse wheel Rotary-knob click Selects parameters Quits the Edit mode 1146.2078.62 3.10 E-5 R&S UPV General Information on Operation Operation Using an External PC Keyboard A commercially available, external PC keyboard (not supplied with the instrument) can be connected to one of the 4 USB interfaces at the front or rear of the instrument (see Chapter 1, "Connecting an External Keyboard", page 1.26). It simplifies the input of list entries, comment texts, file names, etc. A keyboard is required for operating Windows®. The keys on the front panel of the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV correspond to the following keys and key combinations on the external PC keyboard: Front panel PC keyboard Front panel PC keyboard Softkeys F5 … F12 F5 … F12 0 … 9; A … Z 0 … 9; A … Z START CTRL + F5 � SPACE SINGLE CTRL + F6 •;*…# •;*…# STOP CONT CTRL + F7 +/- +/- Loudspeaker ON CTRL + F8 A Volume CTRL + F9 MENU CTRL + M H COPY CTRL + P UNDO BACKSPACE SHUT-DOWN CTRL + F10 ESC ESC LOCAL CTRL + F11 Enter, rotary-knob click ENTER OUTPUT OFF CTRL + F12 Cursor keys Cursor keys SCREEN � CTRL + PAGE UP WINBAR ALT + W SCREEN � CTRL + PAGE DOWN MODIFY ALT + M WINDOW � CTRL + SHIFT + TAB HIDE ALT + H WINDOW � CTRL + TAB CLOSE ALT + C SCAN � ALT + PAGE UP HELP F1 SCAN � ALT + PAGE DOWN SAVE ALT + S PAGE � PAGE DOWN LOAD ALT + L PAGE � PAGE UP PRESET ALT + P 1146.2078.62 3.11 a SHIFT + A … Z E-5 Display R&S UPV Display Display and Screens The display is the central element for operating the R&S UPV. Both the instrument settings in the various panels, and the measurement results are displayed here. To make the various functions of the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV easier to operate, they were organized in a series of panels. The measurement results can be displayed as digital numeric values, in data lists, in analog bargraphs or in result graphics. The user can freely choose the number of panels and the number of graphical windows to be shown in the display. The size of the panels can be changed within wide limits, whereby the font size, scaling and so on are adapted automatically according to the type of display window. 5 display windows (or "screens") are provided so that the wealth of information can be better organized. The user can toggle between the individual screens in the following way: From front panel Use the direction keys With PC keyboard Use the key combinations CTRL + PAGE UP and CTRL + PAGE DOWN With mouse First open the menu bar at the top of the display, then click the Screen button and finally select the desired screen. Alternatively, you can also select the desired screen directly by clicking it on the tool bar. 1146.2078.62 3.12 E-5 R&S UPV Display Numeric display field Panel Graphical window "hidden" Panels Softkey bar Softkeys Tool bar (example) Fig.: 3-1 R&S UPV display with its 5 screens and example of a tool bar 1146.2078.62 3.13 E-5 Display R&S UPV WINBAR and Softkeys One of the two bars (either the softkey bar or the WINBAR) is always displayed at the bottom of the screen. The softkey bar which has a varying range of functions is visible in normal operating mode. In most cases, the functions available in the selection windows of the panels are displayed in the eight buttons; these functions are displayed even if the parameter lists have not (yet) been opened. The labelling of these buttons indicates the functions of the softkeys underneath them. The function that has just been selected is indicated by a "pressed" button, as shown in the example below for the "RMS" function. If there are more than 8 elements to choose from, the hidden elements in the selection list can be displayed by pressing the last softkey containing the �� symbol or the first softkey containing the �� symbol. Pressing the respective softkey permits rapid selection. Softkeys with an additional tick box are also used for a number of applications. In the example below, the left-hand softkey F5 can be used to activate and deactivate the X cursor in a curve diagram. The other softkeys are used to make other settings affecting this cursor. The advantage of this combination is that the user can activate/deactivate a function (here the cursor) using one button and at the same time use the other softkeys for additional settings. Another variant is the combination of several softkeys with tick box and softkeys without tick box. The example below shows the softkeys for the MODIFY function, described in detail in the section "Moving and Resizing Panels and Graphical Windows" on page 3.16. When a softkey with tick box is selected, the softkey bar remains open so that further settings (e.g. moving a panel) can be carried out. Actuating the other softkeys immediately triggers an action (here, for example, fixing the size of the panel), whereupon the softkey bar is hidden. If an external PC keyboard is used, the softkeys can be operated using the F5 to F12 keys; if a mouse is used, the buttons in the softkey bar can be clicked directly. 1146.2078.62 3.14 E-5 R&S UPV Display When the WINBAR key is pressed, the WINBAR appears in place of the softkey bar; this is indicated by "Panel List" in the left-hand corner: The labeled buttons show the names of all panels and graphical windows open in the current screen. Pressing the associated softkey puts the focus on the corresponding panel / graphical window, i.e. it becomes active. At the same time, the system returns to normal operating mode (i.e. the softkey bar). Hidden panels (see "Opening, Operating, Hiding and Closing Panels", page 3.21) are also listed in the WINBAR. If a hidden panel is selected, it is redisplayed on the screen with its previously set size and position; it simultaneously receives the focus. The panels and graphical windows displayed in the WINBAR can also be selected by pressing the F5 to F12 keys on the PC keyboard or by clicking with the mouse. The panel with the focus can be recognized by the highlighted title bar (as shown here in the example on the right-hand side): It is possible to toggle between the softkey bar and WINBAR at any time by pressing the WINBAR key. Function Front panel PC keyboard Mouse Select softkey function Press softkey. Press keys F5 to F12. Click button of associated softkey. 1146.2078.62 3.15 E-5 Display R&S UPV Moving and Resizing Panels and Graphical Windows As soon as a panel or display window has the focus, it becomes active and can be moved around the screen or resized. This can be done in the following ways: • The mouse can be used to move or resize the selected panel directly in the same way as other Windows® applications. • In the case of operation without mouse, the MODIFY key (key combination ALT + M on an external PC keyboard) must be pressed, whereupon the following labels appear on the softkey bar: The associated panel can now be resized or moved; this is indicated by the label in the title bar: Pressing the MODIFY key again restores the original operating mode. Apart from resizing and moving, the MODIFY mode also offers a number of other functions described in the following list: This button is particularly useful for graphical windows. When the Full Screen button is actuated, the selected panel is enlarged so that it covers the entire screen. If this command is used for panels, they are enlarged to their full length and width. Panels the length of which exceeds the screen height are reduced to full screen height. Actuating this softkey quits the MODIFY mode and the selected panel becomes active again. When the Horiz Move button is selected, the rotary knob can be used to move the panel/window horizontally without changing the size. When all modifications to the panel have been made, pressing the MODIFY key restores the original operating mode. When the Horiz Size button is selected, the rotary knob can be used to resize the panel/window (the right-hand edge of the selected panel is moved). When all modifications to the panel have been made, pressing the MODIFY key restores the original operating mode. When the Vert Move button is selected, the rotary knob can be used to move the panel/window vertically without changing the size. When all modifications to the panel have been made, pressing the MODIFY button restores the original operating mode. 1146.2078.62 3.16 E-5 R&S UPV Display When the Vert Size button is selected, the rotary knob can be used to resize the panel/window (the bottom edge of the selected panel is moved). When all modifications to the panel have been made, pressing the MODIFY key restores the original operating mode. Actuating the Fix Size Auto Size button switches to "Auto Size" mode and adjusts the size of the selected panel/window to display all setting times or to use the full height of the screen. This state is indicated by an asterisk in the title bar. The default setting is "Fix Size". With this setting, the panel is not enlarged if, for example, additional fields appear in the panel when certain functions are selected; only the scroll bar indicates the presence of additional fields. Actuating the button again toggles between the two modes. Actuating this softkey quits the MODIFY mode and the selected panel becomes active again. Actuating the Fix Size All Auto Size All button switches all panels/windows to "Auto Size" mode and adjusts the size of the panels/windows to display all setting times or to use the full height of the screen. This state is indicated by an asterisk in the title bars. Actuating the button again toggles between the two modes. Actuating this softkey quits the MODIFY mode and the selected panel becomes active again. When the Close All button is selected, all of the panels and measurement windows displayed on the screen are closed. The function corresponds to the CLOSE key, except that it affects all panels and measurement windows displayed on the screen. Actuating this softkey quits the MODIFY mode and the selected panel becomes active again. 1146.2078.62 3.17 E-5 Display R&S UPV Function Front panel PC keyboard Enlarge graphical window to full screen size Press MODIFY key and actuate F5 softkey. Press key combination ALT + M and then F5 key. Move panel/graphical window Press MODIFY key, select direction of movement using softkey and move panel using rotary knob. Press key combination ALT + M, select direction of movement using keys F6 or F8 and move panel using keys TAB and SHIFT + TAB. Click title bar of panel and drag to resize. Resize panel/graphical window horizontally and vertically Press MODIFY key, select resizing direction using softkey and resize panel using rotary knob. Press key combination ALT + M, select resizing direction using keys F7 or F9 and resize panel using keys TAB and SHIFT + TAB. Drag top/bottom or side edge of panel. Resize panel/graphical window proportionally (horizontally and vertically) Press MODIFY key, change to second level using �� button, actuate F6 softkey and resize panel using rotary knob. Press key combination ALT + M, press F12 key and then F6 key, and resize panel using keys TAB and SHIFT + TAB. Drag one corner of panel. Adjust panel/graphical window to the required size Press MODIFY key and actuate Fix Size Auto Size or Fix Size All Auto Size All button. Press key combination ALT + M, then press F10 or F11 key. --- Close all panels/panel on screen Press MODIFY key, change to second level using �� button and actuate F10 softkey. Press key combination ALT + M, F12 key and then F10 key. --- 1146.2078.62 3.18 Mouse Click button in title bar of respective graphical window. E-5 R&S UPV Display Status Displays and Messages In some cases, the user is presented with additional information on the screen. This information includes status messages, messages concerning the value ranges, information on settings, warnings and error messages. Status displays The status of the R&S UPV is continuously displayed for the generator, analyzer, sweep system and other instrument states at the bottom of the screen above the four right-hand softkeys. Status displays always appear at the same position; they are assigned to the fields above the softkeys as shown below. Analyzer Channel 1 Analyzer Channel 2 Generator Sweep A list of all possible status messages can be found at the end of this chapter (section "Overview of Status Messages", page 3.126). Valid value range Information on the possible entries is given at the bottom of the screen above the softkey bar. The ranges for value entries specified here always take the current status of the instrument into consideration and therefore depend on the presets already configured. Below is an example for entry of the generator output voltage: Information Information concerning the panel settings and so on is also given at the bottom of the screen above the softkey bar (only the space above the four left-hand softkeys is used). 1146.2078.62 3.19 E-5 Display R&S UPV Warnings If the user attempts to make measurement settings which conflict with the usual test specifications, warnings appear on the screen; and remain there until they are acknowledged with ENTER. Warnings are issued if no measurement results are produced during measuring mode. This is normally the result of unsuitable input signals or settings. For example, input signals may be too low to produce a stable measurement result. In this case, a warning is displayed in the middle of the screen instead of the measurement result. The warning indicates why no measurement result can be displayed and may also list several reasons for this. Error messages If faults in the instrument occur during operation, an error message appears in the middle of the screen. This message remains on screen until it is acknowledged with ENTER. 1146.2078.62 3.20 E-5 R&S UPV Panels Panels Panel and Window Types In the case of the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV, associated settings and functions are always combined in "panels". Each of these panels has a name (headline in the title bar) by which it is called up. Only one panel can have the focus, i.e. only one panel can be active at any one time. The panel with the focus can be identified by its blue title bar. The Audio Analyzer R&S UPV distinguishes between the following panels and display windows: • Panels used to make function settings • Configuration panels used for configuring how the measurement values are to be displayed • Numeric display fields for displaying the measurement values of the various measurement functions • Combi displays in which the numeric display of measurement values can be supplemented by bargraphs, min/max values and limit monitoring • Graphical windows in which measurement values are displayed in the form of diagrams • Data lists in which the measurement values are listed in tabular form; this also includes the "Dig Analyzer Protocol" display window, in which the values of the protocol data of a digital audio data stream are displayed (R&S UPV-K21 option). A detailed list of all panels together with the most important setting parameters can be found at the end of this chapter (see "Overview of Panels and Measurement Displays (Graphical Windows)", page 3.122). Opening, Operating, Hiding and Closing Panels Each panel and display window is a separate panel which can be either closed, opened or hidden. All panels/display windows visible on the currently displayed screen are referred to as being "open". If the panel is minimized and moved to the bottom of the screen, it is referred to as being "hidden". In both cases, the panel/window is assigned an entry in the WINBAR at the bottom of the display. The same panel or display window can be displayed (i.e. opened) in several screens. The display characteristics (position, size) can be different for each of the screens; the content is, however, always the same. 1146.2078.62 3.21 E-5 Panels R&S UPV Open panel Panels/display windows are open if they are visible on the currently displayed screen. A panel is opened on the currently displayed screen by activating the menu bar using the MENÜ key, highlighting the Instruments or Disp Config button with the rotary knob or cursor keys, opening the pulldown menu with the ENTER key or rotary-knob click, and highlighting and selecting a panel. Graphical windows are selected in the same way, except that they are listed under the Displays button. Activate panel Only one panel can be active on the screen at any one time. Every open or hidden panel can be activated using the softkeys on the WINBAR or using the Windows key (active panels are identified by their blue title bar). Hide panel Open panels/display windows can be minimized and placed at the bottom of the screen. They are referred to as being "hidden". A panel must be activated before it can be hidden. It is then hidden by pressing the HIDE key. Close panel A panel must be activated before it can be closed. It is then closed by pressing the CLOSE key and no longer appears on the WINBAR. The table below shows the alternative operating modes for mouse and external keyboard: Function Front panel PC keyboard Mouse Open panel Press MENU key and highlight Instruments , Disp Config or Displays button using rotary knob or cursor keys, open pulldown menu using ENTER key or rotary-knob click, and highlight and select a panel. Press key combination CTRL + M, then highlight Instruments , Disp Config or Displays button using TAB or SHIFT + TAB keys, open pulldown menu using Enter key, highlight a panel using cursor keys and select using Enter key. Open menu bar by moving to left edge of screen, actuate Instruments , Disp Config or Displays button and click desired panel. Activate panel Press WINBAR key and actuate softkey of desired panel. Press key combination ALT + F5, then actuate softkey of desired panel using appropriate key F5 to F12. Click anywhere in desired panel. Hide panel Pressing HIDE key hides currently active panel. Pressing key combination ALT + H hides currently active panel. Click button in title bar of respective panel. Close panel Pressing CLOSE key closes currently active panel. Pressing key combination ALT + C hides currently active panel. Click button in title bar of respective graphical window. 1146.2078.62 3.22 E-5 R&S UPV Panels Panel Structure This section describes the panel structure. The section "Opening, Operating, Hiding and Closing Panels", page 3.21 describes how to operate panels on the screen; the section "Selecting a Parameter – Selection Fields", page 3.34 describes how to set the parameters.The panels are in Windows® format. They differ in detail depending on their function but they consist of the same main elements. Panels consist of up to three columns, depending on the function block on which the panel is based. For example, two-channel functions are operated in panels with two columns. When defining graphical windows, settings from Trace 1 can be adopted for Trace 2 in a third column between the two original columns so that Trace 2 does not have to be configured separately. Each panel contains a selection of different parameter fields which are combined in groups. Various types of parameter fields, which are operated in different ways, are used. The parameter fields have labels indicating their function. 1146.2078.62 3.23 E-5 Panels R&S UPV Panels consist of the following elements: Title bar The top field contains the name of the panel ("Analyzer Function" in the example) and the title-bar buttons for hiding and closing the menu. The buttons can be operated with the mouse. For operation using the front panel, the HIDE and CLOSE keys can be used. The button maximizes graphical windows so that they cover the entire screen (see "WINBAR and Softkeys", page 3.14). Headlines in panels With multi-column panels, each column has a headline. Function groups In panels, parameter fields which belong together with respect to their function are frequently combined in function groups. Grey lines indicate these groups. Numeric entry field A numeric value (e.g. the frequency) can be entered in this field. Units The unit of a numeric value is displayed next to the entry field. When the value is entered, all possible units are offered on the softkey bar (on more than one level where necessary). The entry can be completed by selecting the unit using a softkey. The unit can be changed after the entry has been made. In this case, the physical value remains unchanged; however, the value displayed in the entry field is adapted automatically to the changed unit. Text entry field An alphanumeric value (e.g. a label text) can be entered in this field. 1146.2078.62 3.24 E-5 R&S UPV Panels Button Buttons are used to trigger actions; here, for example, to show the display of a measurement graph. Tick box If a tick box is activated, the assigned setting can be disabled or enabled. Radio button With radio buttons, it is possible to toggle between two settings by simply clicking the desired setting. Only one of the two options can be active at any one time. Selection field The button indicates that a parameter list is available. The fold-down parameter list is displayed below the selection field. Depending on the number of items, the full list or only part of it is shown. Only one item at a time can be selected from the parameter list. Display fields Some settings can only be made in a specific configuration. If the setting is not permitted with the specific configuration selected, the respective item is disabled and displayed in grey and the field cannot be accessed. In this case, the field acts as a display field, i.e. the value displayed there corresponds to the value actually set. Track box With multi-column panels, settings can be transferred from the left-hand to the right-hand column without the parameter having to be entered a second time. If the track box has a checkmark, all of the settings within the function group are applicable to both columns. All fields with transferred settings are shown as display fields and cannot be accessed while the track function is active. 1146.2078.62 3.25 E-5 Panels R&S UPV Hidden parameter fields � 1146.2078.62 The R&S UPV always attempts to keep the panels as short as possible. For this reason, unneeded fields are hidden. The example to the left demonstrates this more clearly: The fields for Zoom Factor, Center and Span only appear if the Zooming function is activated. 3.26 E-5 R&S UPV Panels Navigating in the Panels If a panel has more fields than can be displayed on the screen or if the size of the panel has been fixed such that its full length cannot be displayed (see "Moving and Resizing Panels and Graphical Windows", page 3.16), the scroll bar appears along the right-hand side of the panel. The length of the scroll bar symbolizes the overall length of the panel; the dark part of the scroll bar indicates which section of the panel is currently visible. There are various ways of navigating inside panels, i.e. moving the entry focus: • With operation via the front panel, the easiest navigation method is using the rotary knob. Turning the rotary knob clockwise moves the focus down or to the right. Here the focus first moves to the right inside a field, then down through the current group, then jumps over to the right-hand column, down again to the end of the group from where the focus then moves to the left-hand column of the following group, and so on. • and can also be used for navigation; the movement Alternatively, the cursor keys sequence is the same as that described for operation using the rotary knob. • In the case of an external PC keyboard, the cursor keys � and � can be used to move around a panel. Once again, the movement sequence is the same as that described for navigation using the rotary knob. The TAB and SHIFT + TAB keys on the external keyboard can also be used as an alternative to the cursor keys. • The mouse can also be used to move inside the panels in the same way as other Windows® applications, i.e. by directly clicking the desired parameter fields or by moving the scroll bar. 1146.2078.62 3.27 E-5 Settings on the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV R&S UPV Settings on the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV The R&S UPV offers several and sometimes alternative options for setting parameters. Operation is possible via the front panel, using a mouse and/or a connected PC keyboard (see the sections "Using the Rotary Knob", "Operation Using the Mouse" and "Operation Using an External PC Keyboard" from page 3.9 onwards). The tables below list the operating options with the available entry media. Some keys on the front panel of the R&S UPV trigger a setting immediately; for example, the OUTPUT OFF key deactivates or reactivates outputs. An overview showing the function of all keys can be found at the end of this chapter (section "Overview of Keys", page 3.118). Most of the parameters are set in the panels. The panels are operated on the screen in the way described in the section "Opening, Operating, Hiding and Closing Panels" (see page 3.21). How to enter and select setting parameters in the panels is described in the following sections; a detailed description of all setting parameters can be found in Chapter 4, "Instrument Functions". Entries for file management tasks, such as saving and loading instrument settings, saving files, and so on, are made in special panels. Refer to the section "File Management" (see page 3.102) for more detailed information. A number of settings are made via the menu bar. These include all global configuration settings for the R&S UPV, e.g. setting of the IEC/IEEE-bus address, the function of the H Copy key, etc. More detailed information can be found in the section "Settings in the Menu Bar" on page 3.86 and in Chapter 4, "Instrument Functions". The R&S UPV uses the WindowsXP operating system. Settings at system level are only rarely required, e.g. installation of a new printer driver. Connecting a keyboard and mouse makes Windows easier to use. 1146.2078.62 3.28 E-5 R&S UPV Settings in the Panels Settings in the Panels Associated settings and functions are combined in panels of the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV. Each function block has its own panel. The panels can be set independently of each other; however, there are also a number of interdependencies. For example, the digital measurement function of the protocol analysis only appears in the Analyzer Function panel if a digital analyzer has been selected in the Analyzer Config panel. If an analog analyzer is selected, the protocol analysis is automatically deactivated in the Analyzer Function panel and a message is displayed on the screen. Focus Panels can only be operated if they have the focus (indicated by the blue title bar). The simplest way of changing from one panel to another in the case of operation via the front panel is . The � key switches from panel to panel in the sequence in which the using the direction keys panels were opened. Hidden panels are not highlighted. Changing to a different open (or to a hidden) panel is also possible using the WINBAR; this has already been explained in the section "WINBAR and Softkeys" on page 3.14. Before settings can be made in a panel, the relevant parameter field must be highlighted, i.e. it must have the focus. This is indicated by a selection frame which is blue, green or magenta depending on the entry mode. The colors of the selection frame have the following meaning: A blue selection frame indicates a highlighted field. A green selection frame highlights fields in which parameters can be selected or in which an entry can be made without the selection / entry having an immediate effect on the hardware of the R&S UPV. A magenta selection frame indicates that selecting a button, activating a tick box or changing a numeric value will be immediately passed on to the hardware and executed. When the instrument is switched on, the most recently saved instrument settings are loaded automatically so that the instrument is in the same state as it was before power-off. The focus is placed on the first position of the active panel. Panels are opened using the menu bar (see the section "Open panel", page 3.22). How to move the focus is described in the section "Navigating in the Panels" (see page 3.27). 1146.2078.62 3.29 E-5 Settings in the Panels R&S UPV Changing the Instrument The Audio Analyzer R&S UPV can, depending on the installed options, be used at analog and digital interfaces. Optional plug-ins can be installed to allow additional interfaces to be operated. Each of these interfaces determines the basic characteristics of the R&S UPV, whereby these characteristics are separate for generator and analyzer. These interface characteristics define quasi-independent instruments within the R&S UPV. The settings for these instruments are made in the selection field in the first field of the Generator Config and Analyzer Config panel. Each of these instruments has its own data set. If a different instrument is selected, this data set is saved. As a result, the previous settings are available when the original instrument is selected again. The data set has a different content for each instrument. The data sets differ with regard to the following points: • Selection of parameter fields / parameters Example: In the case of analog instruments, all settings for configuring the analog interfaces are available (e.g. impedances); all settings for the other instruments, e.g. the digital sampling rate and so on, do not appear in the panel but remain in the background. • Valid value range of parameters For example, the frequency ranges can be different in the different instruments. • Units used Levels are given in different units in analog and digital applications. • Selection of functions A number of measurement functions are only available for digital audio applications; they are therefore not offered in analog instruments. Examples: Digital protocol analysis, jitter, etc. The examples given above show that the choice of instrument not only affects the Generator Config and Analyzer Config panel, but also has an effect on the other panels. Changing Functions The principles that apply to changing an instrument also apply to changing functions (e.g. from an RMS measurement to a THD measurement or from generating a sinusoidal to a multi-tone signal): Each measurement function and generator function has its own data set. If a different function is selected, this data set is saved. As a result, the previous settings are available again when a different function is selected. 1146.2078.62 3.30 E-5 R&S UPV Settings in the Panels The data set has a different content for each function. The data sets differ with regard to the following points: • Selection of parameter fields / parameters: Example: With the RMS measurement, various measurement times are offered; this is not the case for the FFT analysis. • Valid value range of parameters For example, the frequencies which can be set for intermodulation test signals are different to those which can be set for sinusoidal signals. • Units used For example, THD measurements and level measurements are given in different units. The following generally applies: All the settings for the other functions, e.g. filter settings and so on, remain in the background with the function settings and are displayed in the panel and set in the instrument again the next time this function is called up. Hiding Parameter Fields The R&S UPV always attempts to keep the panels as short as possible. For this reason, unneeded fields are hidden. The example below explains this more clearly: As soon as Auto Sweep is selected in the Sweep Ctrl menu item in the Generator Function panel, all of the fields required for configuring the sweep are displayed in the panel (together with the parameters set for the sweep last performed). If the sweep is deactivated, all of the sweep parameter fields are hidden. The user is presented with a shorter panel and is not burdened with parameter fields which are currently not needed. Note: The sequence of the individual parameter fields in the panel is such that changes to parameters usually only cause changes in the fields below. When making settings in panels, it is therefore recommended to begin at the top of the panel and work down. 1146.2078.62 3.31 E-5 Settings in the Panels R&S UPV Highlighting Control Elements A control element is always selected in the same way, regardless of whether it is a tick box, radio button, entry field and so on. A control element is activated by shifting the focus to this element. The entry focus is indicated by a blue, green or magenta border. The entry focus can be moved using the rotary knob, cursor keys or mouse. Refer to the section "Navigating in the Panels", page 3.27. Activating/Deactivating Functions – Tick boxes A tick box is always used for functions which can be activated and deactivated only. If the tick box is activated (checkmark), the assigned setting can be disabled or enabled. Before a function can be activated and deactivated, the associated element must be highlighted (see the section "Highlighting Control Elements", page 3.32). The highlighted element is then activated or deactivated (toggle function) using the ENTER functions of the various entry media ( ENTER key, rotary-knob click and so on). If the mouse is used, functions are activated/deactivated as soon as the tick box is clicked. Function Front panel PC keyboard Mouse Activate/deactivate Highlight desired element using rotary knob or cursor keys, activate/deactivate function with rotary-knob click or ENTER key. Highlight desired element using cursor keys, activate/deactivate function with Enter key. Click tick box. 1146.2078.62 3.32 E-5 R&S UPV Settings in the Panels Toggling Functions – Radio Buttons Radio buttons are used for functions which can be toggled between two settings. A black dot in the appropriate button indicates the selected status. Only one of the two options can be active at any one time. Before a function can be toggled, the associated element must be highlighted (see the section "Highlighting Control Elements", page 3.32). The ENTER functions of the various entry media can then be used to switch between the two settings (toggle function). If the mouse is used, settings are executed as soon as the corresponding radio button is clicked. Function Front panel PC keyboard Mouse Toggle Highlight desired element using rotary knob or cursor keys, toggle function with rotaryknob click or ENTER key. Highlight desired element using cursor keys, toggle function with Enter key. Click desired radio button. 1146.2078.62 3.33 E-5 Settings in the Panels R&S UPV Selecting a Parameter – Selection Fields Actuating the button opens a selection field. As soon as a parameter field has the focus, a list for selecting the available parameters can be opened with a rotary-knob click, the ENTER key or by clicking with the mouse. The fold-down parameter list is displayed below the selection field. Selection is made by highlighting the desired item and confirming with ENTER; only one item at a time can be selected. Items in the parameter list are highlighted using the rotary knob, the cursor keys or the keys . If a mouse is used, the items are selected and activated by clicking with the mouse. The parameter list can be quit without adopting the highlighted parameter by pressing the ESC key. If the list is longer than the displayed window, a scroll bar is available. Note 1: The contents of the parameter lists are not fixed but vary depending on other settings selected. Note 2: Alternatively, parameters can also be selected using the softkeys (see the section "WINBAR and Softkeys", page 3.14). Function Front panel PC keyboard Open parameter list Rotary-knob click or press ENTER key. Press Enter key. Scroll Move displayed section of list using rotary knob or up/down cursor keys. Move displayed section of list using up/down cursor keys. Select parameter Highlight selection using rotary knob or up/down cursor keys and confirm with rotary-knob click or ENTER key. Highlight selection using up/down cursor keys and press Enter key. Click parameter. Quit parameter list without adopting a setting Press ESC key. Press ESC key. Click anywhere outside parameter list. 1146.2078.62 3.34 Mouse Click button. Click or button in scroll bar until desired item is displayed. E-5 R&S UPV Settings in the Panels Numeric Entries – Numeric Entry Fields Numeric values (e.g. the output voltage) can be entered or edited in these fields. This can be done is various ways. However, the following applies irrespective of the chosen method: Note: Entries outside the possible value range are not accepted; an audible warning is issued and the entry is changed to its permissible minimum or maximum value. The possible value range is displayed above the softkey bar. 1146.2078.62 3.35 E-5 Settings in the Panels R&S UPV Value entries in Edit mode – green selection frame When the focus is moved to a numeric entry field, the system enters Edit mode, which is indicated by a green selection frame. In addition, the current numeric value is highlighted with a blue background. If a completely new value is to be entered, simply begin entering digits using the numeric keypad on the front panel or external PC keyboard; the old value is deleted automatically when the first key is pressed. The digit to the left of the cursor can be deleted at any time during entry using the UNDO key. If certain digits only are to be changed, position the digit cursor accordingly using the or cursor key and enter the new digits (if the position of the digit cursor is changed before the first digit is entered, the old value will not be deleted). The default setting is insert mode. It is only possible to change between insert and overwrite mode if an external PC keyboard is used. The numeric entry field is closed with: ENTER The newly entered value is adopted. ESC The old value is retained. Softkeys The selected unit is set and adopted together with the newly entered value. The entry is set in the hardware as soon as the numeric entry field is closed. Note: Only the number keys and cursor keys are accepted; the rotary knob, letters and special characters have no effect when numeric values are being entered. When an external PC keyboard is connected, digit entry can also be completed by entering the unit. Here it is sufficient for example to enter m to the set voltage value to mV, or k to set a frequency value to kHz. 1146.2078.62 3.36 E-5 R&S UPV Settings in the Panels Value entries in Direct mode – magenta selection frame When the focus is moved to a numeric entry field, the system enters Edit mode, which is indicated by a green selection frame. Changing to the Direct mode is performed by pressing the ENTER key or with rotary-knob click, the selection frame is changed to magenta. The digit cursor then moves to the first digit to the right of the decimal point or, if there is no decimal point, to the digit at the extreme right. A digit can now be entered using the keypad on the front panel or the external PC keyboard; the digit at the cursor position is replaced. The cursor does not change its position. The digit cursor can be placed at a different position at any and time using the entered at the new position. cursor keys. Digits are then Entries in Direct mode are always made in overwrite mode (this also applies when an external PC keyboard is used). In Direct mode, every setting change is immediately passed on to the hardware and executed. The Direct mode can be quit using the ENTER function, the ESC key or by clicking in a different field with the mouse. Note: Only rotary-knob entries, number keys and cursor keys are accepted; letters and special characters have no effect. 1146.2078.62 3.37 E-5 Settings in the Panels R&S UPV Rotary-knob entries in Direct mode – magenta selection frame When the focus is moved to a numeric entry field, the system enters Edit mode, which is indicated by a green selection frame. Changing to the Direct mode is performed by pressing the ENTER key or with rotary-knob click, the selection frame is changed to magenta. The digit cursor then moves to the first digit to the right of the decimal point or, if there is no decimal point, to the digit at the extreme right. The highlighted digit can then be changed directly using the rotary knob, whereby the numeric value is "carried over", i.e. transferred to the next digit. The digit cursor can be placed at a different position at any and cursor keys so that other digits time using the can be changed using the rotary knob. This method is ideal for calibration work as every change has an immediate effect in the hardware. Value entry can be completed with a rotary-knob click or, alternatively, using the ENTER function, the ESC key or by clicking in a different field with the mouse. As an alternative to the rotary knob, the numeric values can also be changed using the and cursor keys. Note: Changes made to values using the rotary wheel are not accepted if the entries are outside the possible value range; an audible warning is issued and the entry is changed to its permissible minimum or maximum value. The possible value range is displayed above the softkey bar. 1146.2078.62 3.38 E-5 R&S UPV Settings in the Panels Entering / changing the unit of a value The unit of a numeric value is displayed next to the entry field. When the value is entered, all units available for the respective function are offered on the softkey bar (on more than one level where necessary). The entry can be completed by selecting the unit using a softkey. This is done differently depending on the selected mode: • In Edit mode, the newly entered numeric value is adopted and set together with the selected unit. • In Direct mode, the physical value (number with the previously selected unit) is converted to the newly selected unit and adopted as the new numeric value. It is possible to change the unit in any highlighted numeric field using the softkeys at a later stage after value entry has been completed and also if the value itself is not to be changed. In this case, the physical value remains unchanged (as in the Direct mode); however, the value displayed in the entry field is adapted automatically to the changed unit. This function allows numeric values to be "converted" to other units very easily. 1146.2078.62 3.39 E-5 Settings in the Panels R&S UPV Information on using reference values when entering values The Audio Analyzer R&S UPV allows reference values to be used when entering various values. These reference values are used as a basis for settings for other parameters. � The example below explains these interdependencies: A reference voltage (Ref Voltage) can be set in the Generator Config panel. The actual output voltage is set in the Generator Function panel where the unit is dBr, i.e. it is possible to enter the output voltage in dB relative to this reference value. This method is particularly useful if, e.g. with an A/D converter, the clipping level has been determined and other measurements (frequency response, THD+N, etc) have to be performed using test signals which are a certain dB value (defined in the test specifications) below this fullscale level. � 1146.2078.62 However, it is important to note that the maximum values of the R&S UPV cannot be exceeded; this applies to both system-specific maximum values and maximum values which originate from other elements (here for example the Max. Voltage setting). If by increasing the reference value the maximum output voltage is exceeded, the value for Voltage in the Generator Function panel is automatically reduced. In the example shown opposite, the maximum output voltage of 20 V forms the limit; setting the reference value to 100 V results in a reduction of the Voltage value in the bottom window. 3.40 E-5 R&S UPV Settings in the Panels Function Front panel PC keyboard Mouse Enter new value (Edit mode) Highlight numeric entry field and enter new value directly using numeric keypad. Highlight numeric entry field and enter new value directly using number keys. --- Change individual digits (Edit mode) Highlight numeric entry field, position digit cursor with � or � cursor key and enter new digit directly using numeric keypad. Highlight numeric entry field, position digit cursor with � or cursor key and enter new digit directly using number keys. --- Complete value entry Complete entry with ENTER key. Complete entry with ENTER key. --- Complete value entry with unit selection Press softkey with desired unit. Use F5 to F12 keys to select desired unit or Complete entry by pressing the keys m, k, etc. to set the value to mV, kHz, etc. Click softkey button with desired unit. Quit value entry without adopting value Press ESC key. Press ESC key. Click in a different entry field. Change value (Direct mode) Highlight numeric entry field, switch to Direct mode with ENTER key, position digit cursor with � or � cursor key and enter new digit directly using numeric keypad. All changes are set directly in hardware. Highlight numeric entry field, switch to Direct mode with ENTER key, position digit cursor with �or cursor key and enter new digit directly using number keys. All changes are set directly in hardware. --- Vary value (Direct mode) Highlight numeric entry field, switch to Direct mode with rotary-knob click; position digit cursor with � or � cursor key. Vary numeric value using rotary knob. All changes are set directly in hardware. Highlight numeric entry field, switch to Direct mode with ENTER key; position digit cursor with �or cursor key. Vary numeric value using � or � cursor key. All changes are set directly in hardware. --- Change unit Highlight numeric entry field, select unit using appropriate softkey. Physical value is converted to new numeric value with newly selected unit. Highlight numeric entry field, select unit using F5 to F12 keys. Physical value is converted to new numeric value with newly selected unit. Highlight numeric entry field, click appropriate softkey button to select unit. Physical value is converted to new numeric value with newly selected unit. 1146.2078.62 3.41 E-5 Settings in the Panels R&S UPV Alphanumeric Entries – Text Entry Fields When the focus is moved to a text entry field, the system enters Edit mode, which is indicated by a green selection frame. If the complete text (e.g. for graph labels) is to be newly entered, simply begin entering characters using the keypad on the front panel; the old text is deleted automatically when the first key is pressed. The keypad on the front panel of the R&S UPV is automatically switched to the mode for entering alphanumeric characters. Text is entered in the same way as on mobile phones: The characters assigned to a key are called up in sequence by repeatedly pressing the key (see also the section "Overview of Keys", page 3.118). A different key can be pressed immediately to enter the next character; a brief pause must, however, be made when entering characters assigned to the same key. The space character is assigned to the key, special characters are entered using the decimal-point key and the key is used to toggle between upper and lower-case characters. The character to the left of the cursor can be deleted at any time during entry using the UNDO key. If an external PC keyboard is used, characters can be entered in the usual way. If certain characters only are to be changed, position the or cursor key and cursor accordingly using the enter the new characters (if the position of the cursor is changed before the first character is entered, the old text will not be deleted). The default setting is insert mode. It is only possible to change between insert and overwrite mode if an external PC keyboard is used. The text entry field is closed with: ENTER The newly entered text is adopted. ESC The old text is retained. A text entry field also appears whenever files saved on the R&S UPV are to be called up (e.g. to load saved scans in a diagram) or special functions are to be adopted from files, and so on. Here, the file name can be typed or the ••• button can be actuated to call up the file directory where the desired file can then be selected (details are given in the section "File Management" on page 3.102). 1146.2078.62 3.42 E-5 R&S UPV Settings in the Panels Function Front panel PC keyboard Mouse Enter new text Highlight text entry field and enter new text directly using front panel keypad. Highlight text entry field and enter new text directly using keyboard. --- Change individual characters Highlight text entry field, position cursor with � or � cursor key and enter new character directly using front panel keypad. Highlight text entry field, position cursor with �or cursor keys and enter new character directly using keyboard. --- Complete character entry Complete entry with ENTER key. Complete entry with ENTER key. --- Quit text entry without adopting entered characters Press ESC key. Press ESC key. Click in a different entry field. Display Fields Sometimes it is very useful for operators to receive additional information about their settings. For example, the selected FFT parameter directly affects the frequency resolution in the displayed spectrum. Display fields inside the panels are used in such cases. These fields are shown in grey and cannot be accessed. They always contain valid values and therefore always show settings active in the background; the fields are updated as soon as a setting in the associated parameter field is changed. Depending on the settings selected beforehand, it may in some cases no longer be possible to operate certain elements – the entry field then becomes a display field and is shown in grey as described above. � Example: In the case of the analog generator, various impedances can be set for balanced output. If the generator is switched to unbalanced output, the entry field for impedance becomes a display field and shows the impedance that is valid in this case. Display fields are also used when adopting parameters using track boxes. 1146.2078.62 3.43 E-5 Settings in the Panels R&S UPV Adopting Parameters – Track Box In many cases, settings are to apply e.g. to both measurement channels or to both traces. Here the R&S UPV provides multi-column panels which allow settings to be transferred from the left-hand to the righthand column without the parameter having to be entered a second time. The track boxes, which are displayed in a separate column, are used for this purpose. Track boxes always apply to an entire function group (information on function groups can be found in the section "Panel Structure" on page 3.23).If the track box has a checkmark, all of the settings within the function group are applicable to both columns. All fields with transferred settings in the righthand column are shown as display fields. They appear grey and cannot be accessed while the track function is active. If a setting is changed in the associated setting field in the left-hand column, this change is also shown in the display field in the right-hand column. Help Functions Information on the possible entries is given at the bottom of the screen above the softkey bar. The units offered in the softkey bar and the limits specified in the "Valid Range" field always refer to the highlighted parameter field. The valid value range is given in the unit currently selected. Entries outside the specified value range are not accepted; an audible warning is issued and the entry is changed to its permissible minimum or maximum value. Note: The specified ranges for value entries always take the current status of the instrument into consideration. They are therefore not constant and depend on the presets already configured for other parameters. Below is an example for entry of the generator output voltage; additional units can be displayed by actuating the �� button: 1146.2078.62 3.44 E-5 R&S UPV Settings in the Panels Completing Settings When numeric values are entered, the R&S UPV makes a distinction between Edit mode (indicated by a green selection frame) and Direct mode (indicated by a magenta selection frame). See also the section "Numeric Entries – Numeric Entry Fields" from page 3.35 onwards. • • Numeric entries in Edit mode are not adopted and set in the hardware until the ENTER function is actuated ( ENTER key or rotary-knob click) or a unit is selected using the softkey bar. In Direct mode, numeric values entered or changed using the rotary knob are immediately passed on to the hardware and executed. With tick boxes, functions are activated and deactivated by the hardware as soon as the status of the tick box is toggled with the ENTER function. In the case of operation using the mouse, functions are activated/deactivated as soon as the tick box is clicked. With radio buttons, settings are executed by the hardware as soon as the radio button is toggled with the ENTER function. In the case of operation using the mouse, functions are toggled as soon as the corresponding radio button is clicked. A parameter from a selection field is also executed by actuating the ENTER function. In this case, a simple mouse-click will select and activate the desired parameter. Most settings are made without any noticeable adjustment or calculation times. If a brief calculation time is necessary (e.g. to calculate a multi-tone signal adapted to the FFT analysis), the calculation is performed in the background while the current measurements are continued. Function Front panel PC keyboard Mouse Complete numeric value entry (Edit mode) Complete entry with ENTER key or Complete entry with ENTER key or Click softkey button with desired unit. press softkey with desired unit. use F5 to F12 keys to select desired unit or Complete entry by pressing the keys m, k, etc. to set the value to mV, kHz, etc. Adopt changed numeric values in hardware immediately (Direct mode) Highlight numeric entry field, switch to Direct mode with ENTER key, position digit cursor with � or � cursor key and enter new digit directly using numeric keypad. Highlight numeric entry field, switch to Direct mode with ENTER key, position digit cursor with �or cursor key and enter new digit directly using number keys. --- Change numeric values with immediate adoption by hardware (Direct mode) Highlight numeric entry field, switch to Direct mode with rotary-knob click; position digit cursor with � or � cursor key. Vary numeric value using rotary knob. Highlight numeric entry field, switch to Direct mode with ENTER key; position digit cursor with �or cursor key. Vary numeric value using � or � cursor key. --- Activate/deactivate function Highlight desired element using rotary knob or cursor keys, activate/deactivate function with rotary-knob click or ENTER key. Highlight desired element using cursor keys, activate/deactivate function with Enter key. Click tick box. 1146.2078.62 3.45 E-5 Settings in the Panels R&S UPV Function Front panel PC keyboard Mouse Toggle function Highlight desired element using rotary knob or cursor keys, toggle function with rotaryknob click or ENTER key. Highlight desired element using cursor keys, toggle function with Enter key. Click desired radio button. Select parameter from list Highlight selection using rotary knob or up/down cursor keys and confirm with rotary-knob click or ENTER key. Highlight selection using up/down cursor keys and press Enter key. Click parameter. Entries During Measurement / Data Output Entries can be made at any time. Single measurements, spectral displays: If the entry affects parameters of the current measurement, the current measurement or output is terminated as soon as the entry is confirmed (the newly selected parameters are set and the measurement or output is restarted). Sweep activated: Since changes to parameters during a sweep can influence the measurement and thus have a negative effect on the reliability of the results displayed in the screen graphic, the current sweep is stopped and then after restarted such changes are made. Entries which do not affect the measurement process: Entries which do not affect the current measurement process (e.g. changing a unit) are adopted immediately without the current measurement being interrupted. 1146.2078.62 3.46 E-5 R&S UPV Measurement Displays Measurement Displays The Audio Analyzer R&S UPV offers various types of measurement windows for displaying the results of the numerous measurement functions. The measurement results can be displayed as digital numeric values, in analog bargraphs, in result graphics or in data lists. The user can open any number of measurement windows on the screen. The size of the panels can be changed within wide limits, whereby the font size, scaling and so on are adapted automatically (see also the section "Moving and Resizing Panels and Graphical Windows" on page 3.16). Measurement Functions and Displaying Measurement Results • What (which measurement function) is measured and how (which measurement method) measurement is performed, is preset in the Analyzer Function panel. • The panels for configuring the measurement value display are used to determine how the measurement results are presented (i.e. which unit, how many digits, etc). A series of panels for the different measurement windows are provided for this purpose. • The results are finally displayed in the various measurement windows. The basic settings in these configuration panels and measurement windows are described in the following sections. A detailed description of the individual parameter fields can be found in Chapter 4 "Graphical Display". What is measured and how measurement is performed Fig.: 3-2 Display type for measurement results Display of measurement results Measurements and display of results with Audio Analyzer R&S UPV 1146.2078.62 3.47 E-5 Measurement Displays R&S UPV Numeric Display Field The numeric display field provides a clear overview of the numeric values from various analyzer functions and displays a maximum of 8 numeric value results from the Analyzer Function panel. The individual columns are permanently assigned, from left to right: Column 1: Measurement results from the function which is set in the Function field of the Analyzer Function panel. Column 2: Measurement results for the set Level Monitor function. Column 3: Measurement results for the Input Peak function. Column 4: Display of either the frequency measurement result or, if Freq & Phase or Freq & GrpDel is set, display of the frequency measurement result in the first row and display of the phase or group delay measurement in the second row. Each column is labeled with the name of the displayed measurement function, whereby additional, more specific function-related information may also be shown. Example: With difference frequency distortion measurement, the type of measurement and the associated measurement standard, e.g. DFD d2 (IEC 268), is also displayed. The results from the two measurement channels are shown in both rows (exception: frequency/phase or frequency/group delay measurement). If not all of the columns are required because one or more of the associated measurement functions is deactivated, the column in question is hidden. The numeric display field is opened via the menu bar; it is called up using the Displays button. Function Front panel PC keyboard Mouse Open numeric display field Press MENU key and highlight Displays button using rotary knob or cursor keys, open pulldown menu with ENTER key or rotaryknob click, and highlight and select numeric display field. Press key combination CTRL + M, then highlight Displays button using TAB or SHIFT + TAB keys, open pulldown menu using Enter key, highlight numeric display field using cursor keys and select using Enter key. Open menu bar by moving to left edge of screen, actuate Displays button and click numeric display field. 1146.2078.62 3.48 E-5 R&S UPV Measurement Displays Measurement result display in numeric display field The display of measurement results in the numeric display field is configured in the following panels: • • • • Funct Config Lev Mon Config Input Config Freq / Phase Config The following examples of measurement value displays demonstrate the various display options. A number of basic settings made in these configuration panels are described in the following section. A detailed description of the display options can be found in Chapter 4 "Graphical Display". If the measurement value is within the preset limits or no limits were specified, the measurement value is displayed in green on a black background. A measurement value in a linear unit is displayed with 3 to 7 digits; a measurement value in logarithmic units can be displayed with a resolution of 0.1 dB to 0.00001 dB. If the measurement value overranges or underranges preset limits, the measurement value is displayed in red on a black background. As soon as the measurement value is within the limits again, it is displayed in green. If one of the two measurement channels is deactivated, OFF appears in the associated measurement display. If no measurement result is available (e.g. there is no frequency result during a DC measurement), --- is displayed. 1146.2078.62 3.49 E-5 Measurement Displays R&S UPV Combi Display It is often the case that the numeric value of a measurement result does not contain adequate information. Additional features such as analog bargraphs, limit monitoring or the storage of maximum and minimum values are frequently required. The combi display is used for this purpose. Additional information can be displayed for every measurement shown in the numeric display field. The free selection and free scalability mean that especially important or critical results can be monitored and tracked even when viewing the R&S UPV screen from a relatively long distance. Measured minimum and maximum values Measurement display Bargraph Limit settings Opening combi displays The easiest way to open combi displays is to highlight the respective measurement display in the numeric display field (blue selection frame) and to trigger an ENTER function ( ENTER key or rotary-knob click). Alternatively, the combi displays can also be opened using the associated configuration panel (see the following section). The associated combi display is activated using the Show button in the Display line. Another way is to open the combi display via the menu bar; they are called up using the Display button. 1146.2078.62 3.50 E-5 R&S UPV Measurement Displays Function Front panel PC keyboard Mouse Activate combi display via numeric display field Highlight desired measurement display in numeric display field and open combi display with ENTER key or rotary-knob click. Highlight desired measurement display in numeric display field and open combi display with Enter key. Double-click desired measurement display in numeric display field. Activate combi display via Config panel Highlight DISPLAY button in associated Config panel and open combi display with ENTER key or rotary-knob click. Highlight DISPLAY button in associated Config panel and open combi display with Enter key. Click DISPLAY button in associated Config panel. Settings for measurement result display in combined fields Since a combi display is available for each measurement display of the numeric display field, up to eight of these displays can be opened. The settings for the combi displays (and for the numeric display field itself) are made in four configuration panels, whereby the two measurement channels are displayed in one panel. This results in the following four panels for configuring the measurement results in the combi displays: • • • • Funct Config Lev Mon Config Input Config Freq / Phase Config The associated panels for configuring the combi displays are opened via the menu bar; they are called up using the Disp Config button. Function Front panel PC keyboard Mouse Open panel for configuring combined field or numeric display field Press MENU key and highlight Disp Config button using rotary knob or cursor keys, open pulldown menu with ENTER key or rotary-knob click, and highlight and select desired panel. Press key combination CTRL + M, then highlight Disp Config button using TAB or SHIFT + TAB keys, open pulldown menu using Enter key, highlight desired panel using cursor keys and select using Enter key. Open menu bar by moving to left edge of screen, actuate Disp Config button and click desired panel. 1146.2078.62 3.51 E-5 Measurement Displays R&S UPV Some of the basic settings in these panels are described here using the Lev Mon Config panel as an example. Since the combi display is an extension of the numeric display field, the settings also influence the numeric display field. A detailed description of the display options can be found in Chapter 4 "Instrument Functions" in the section "Graphical Display". Note: Some of the settings described below are only visible if the combi display is of adequate size on the screen. For example, scaling and gridlines are hidden automatically and stepwise if the display is reduced in size. 1146.2078.62 3.52 E-5 R&S UPV Measurement Displays Unit of measurement result This parameter field is used to set the unit for the measurement result display. The units available in the parameter list depend in the type of measurement. An overview of all units used with the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV and their conversion formulae can be found at the end of this chapter (section "Units" from page 3.110 onwards). Details concerning the numeric value display can be specified here for all linear units. For example, it is possible to select whether voltage is to be given in V, mV, PV, and so on. If "Auto" is set, these unit prefixes are automatically adapted to the measurement value. Reference values The reference value for relative measurement values can be set here. This can be a fixed preset value; however, values measured at a different location or values based on the generator settings and so on can also be adopted automatically as reference values. Bargraph scaling If the Autoscale button is actuated, the extreme values that have so far occurred are used for scaling the left-hand and right-hand scale end value. The scaling can, however, also be set manually. The axis can be displayed with linear or logarithmic subdivisions. If manual scaling was selected, the start and end value of the bargraph must be entered in the two fields. If the selected scaling does not encompass all measurement values, a red arrow indicates the end of the scale at which the measurement value is beyond the range of the bargraph. 1146.2078.62 3.53 E-5 Measurement Displays R&S UPV Gridlines The settings Main Grid and Sub Grid are used to subdivide the bargraph. Main gridlines which are labeled with the associated numeric values can be added with different intervals. Subgridlines are used for further subdivisions; these lines are not labeled. Limits A lower and/or upper limit can be defined for each measurement result. If the limit is activated, each measurement value is compared with the limit. The set limits are shown in the bottom part of the combi display and appear as a red limit marking on the bargraph. As soon as one of the limits is exceeded, the measurement display and measurement bar changes from green to red. If the measurement value is within the limits, the measurement display and measurement bar are displayed in green. In order to monitor limit violations over a long period of time without having to watch the measurement displays continuously, the lower and/or upper limit is displayed permanently in red as soon as it is exceeded. Pressing the START key again or entering a new limit resets the limit to green. The measurement display in the numeric display field always behaves in the same way as the measurement display in the combined field; current limit violations can therefore also be monitored in the numeric display field. 1146.2078.62 3.54 E-5 R&S UPV Measurement Displays Extreme values If this tick box is activated, the lowest and highest measurement value is displayed. Display of the Min/Max values can be set separately for each measurement display and for the two measurement channels. The minimum and maximum values which have been measured are shown in the top part of the combi display; an additional blue bar which records the span between the extreme values is also displayed. The Min/Max values can thus also be recorded over a long period of time without the measurement displays having to be monitored continuously. Pressing the START key again resets the Min/Max values. Number of displayed digits The Resolution field is used to set the number of digits used when displaying the measurement values, Min/Max values and limits. Values in linear units can be displayed with 3 to 7 digits; values in logarithmic units can be displayed with a resolution of 0.1 dB to 0.00001 dB. 1146.2078.62 3.55 E-5 Measurement Displays R&S UPV Graphical Windows The most informative method of displaying measurement results is usually a two-dimensional graph. Measurement values as a function of frequency, measurements over a time axis and so on are just a few examples of the many possible applications. The Audio Analyzer R&S UPV makes a distinction between the graphical windows (shown in the following sections) which can be set and modified using the associated configuration panels. All graphical displays can be evaluated using horizontal and vertical cursors; markers are used to identify important measurement points. A broad range of softkey control functions can be used to scale graphs, to display sections of graphs, and to perform many other tasks. Sweep graph Here, the measurement values of a measurement sequence (sweep) can be displayed as a line diagram in a co-ordinate system. One or two traces (TRACE A and TRACE B) can be recorded along an X-axis. Each trace can consist of a large number of scans. The traces can be saved and saved traces, reference curves and/or limit curves can be imported into the graph. Up to four sweep graphs can be displayed at the same time and can all be configured differently. As a result, it is possible to display different measurement functions or display the same measurement function in a different way. 1146.2078.62 3.56 E-5 R&S UPV Measurement Displays FFT graph The frequency spectrum of the FFT measurement function and of the Post FFT which follows a different measurement function is displayed in these panels. One or two traces (TRACE A and TRACE B) can be recorded along a frequency axis. Each trace can consist of a large number of scans. The traces can be saved and saved traces, reference curves and/or limit curves can be imported into the graph. Up to two FFT graphs can be displayed at the same time and can both be configured differently. Waveform The waveform display is a type of oscillogram in which the signal characteristic of the analyzed audio signal over time is displayed. One or two traces (TRACE A and TRACE B) can be recorded along a time axis. The traces can be saved and saved traces, reference curves and/or limit curves can be imported into the graph. This graph can be displayed once only; it is linked to the Waveform Monitor function in the Analyzer Function panel. 1146.2078.62 3.57 E-5 Measurement Displays R&S UPV Bargraph If one of the functions THD, Mod Dist, DFD or DIM is selected in the Analyzer Function panel, the function measurement result can be displayed broken down into its frequency components on a bargraph. The individual distortion products are recorded along a frequency axis. The structure of the distortion products (2nd, 3rd, 4th, … harmonic, DFD of 2nd or 3rd order, etc) can be recognized at a glance. The bargraph can display one or two channels; once again, the results can be saved and saved results can be imported into the graph. Two bargraphs are available so that, for example, THD values at two different measurement points can be displayed or the measurement values of both input channels can be shown on two separate graphs. PESQ graph In these graphics windows, you can display the MOS value of the PESQ measurement as well as the time delay between the reference and measurement signal over a time axis. It is possible to display up to two PESQ graphs simultaneously, where they can be configured differently. 1146.2078.62 3.58 E-5 R&S UPV Measurement Displays Opening graphical windows The graphical windows can be opened via the menu bar; they are called up using the Displays button. Alternatively, the graphical windows can also be opened using the associated configuration panels (see the following section). The associated graphical window is activated using the Show button. In the Analyzer Function panel, it is also possible to use the Show button to open some graphical or data windows. They will then be displayed in the same screen, without opening the associated configuration panels. Function Front panel PC keyboard Mouse Open graphical window via menu bar Press MENU key and highlight Displays button using rotary knob or cursor keys, open pulldown menu with ENTER key or rotaryknob click, and highlight and select desired graphical window. Press key combination CTRL + M, then highlight Displays button using TAB or SHIFT + TAB keys, open pulldown menu using Enter key, highlight desired graphical window using cursor keys and select using Enter key. Open menu bar by moving to left edge of screen, actuate Displays button and click desired graphical window. Open graphical window via Config panel Highlight Show button in associated Config panel and open graphical window with ENTER key or rotary-knob click. Highlight Show button in associated Config panel and open graphical window with Enter key. Click Show button in associated Config panel. Open graphical window via Analyzer Function panel Highlight SHOW button in Analyzer Function panel and open graphical window with ENTER key or rotary-knob click. Highlight SHOW button in Analyzer Function panel and open graphical window with ENTER key. Click SHOW button in Analyzer Function panel. 1146.2078.62 3.59 E-5 Measurement Displays R&S UPV Settings for measurement result display in the graphical windows The settings for configuring the graphical displays are made in the following panels: • • • • Sweep Graph1 … 4 Config FFT Graph 1 … 2 Config Waveform Config Bargraph1 … 2 Config The associated panels for configuring the graphical windows are opened either using the Disp Config button in the menu bar or using the Settings softkey in the graphical window. Function Front panel PC keyboard Mouse Open panel for configuring a graphical window Press MENU key and highlight Disp Config button using rotary knob or cursor keys, open pulldown menu with ENTER key or rotary-knob click, and highlight and select desired panel. Press key combination CTRL + M, then highlight Disp Config button using TAB or SHIFT + TAB keys, open pulldown menu using Enter key, highlight desired panel using cursor keys and select using Enter key. Open menu bar by moving to left edge of screen, actuate Disp Config button and click desired panel. Open panel for configuring a graphical window via softkeys in graphical window Press Settings softkey of respective graphical window. Press F12 key for Settings softkey in respective graphical window. Click Settings softkey in respective graphical window. 1146.2078.62 3.60 E-5 R&S UPV Measurement Displays Some of the basic settings in these panels are described here using the FFT Graph1 Config panel as an example. A detailed description of the display options can be found in Chapter 4 "Graphical Display". Note: Some of the settings described below are only visible if the graphical window is of adequate size on the screen. For example, scaling and gridlines are hidden automatically and stepwise if the display is reduced in size. 1146.2078.62 3.61 E-5 Measurement Displays R&S UPV Settings for the Y-axis All the panels used for configuring graphical windows have three columns. In all graphical windows, two traces (TRACE A and TRACE B) can be recorded along an X-axis. Each trace can consist of several scans. In many cases, settings are to apply to both traces. The track boxes provide multi-column panels which allow settings to be transferred from the left-hand to the righthand column without the parameters having to be entered a second time. If the track box has a checkmark, all of the settings within the function group are applicable to both columns. All fields with transferred settings are shown in the right-hand column as grey display fields. These fields cannot be accessed while the track function is active. If a setting is changed in the associated parameter field in the left-hand column, this change is also shown in the display field in the right-hand column. Values to be displayed The data which is to be graphically displayed can be determined for each trace. Usually this data comes from the selected measurement functions; however, saved data (reference data) can also be displayed. With Label Auto, the Y-axis of the graph can be labeled with the data name selected under Source (see example below), or users can define their own label. The Hold radio button is used to "freeze" the graphical display. Additional scans can be added to a graph ("Append"), or existing scans in a graph can be replaced by new ones ("Replace"). Furthermore, it is also possible to load previously measured and saved scans and append them to the current measurement or replace individual scans with saved ones. 1146.2078.62 3.62 E-5 R&S UPV Measurement Displays Reference values The reference value for relative measurement values can be set here. This can be a fixed preset value; however, values measured at a different location or entire scans from files, from the other measurement channel and so on can also be used automatically as reference values / reference curves. Units of measurement values This parameter field is used to set the unit for the trace. The units available in the parameter list depend in the type of measurement. Alternatively, if the tick box is selected, the unit used in the analyzer will be used. An overview of all units used with the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV and their conversion formulae can be found at the end of this chapter (section "Units" from page 3.110 onwards). Details concerning the numeric value display can be specified here for all linear units. For example, it is possible to select whether voltage is to be given in V, mV, PV, and so on. If "Auto" is set, these unit prefixes are automatically adapted to the measurement value. The used unit will appear on the Y-axis of the graph (see example below). Sometimes it is better to use a label defined by the user; this label can be entered in the parameter field. Y-axis scaling If the button for automatic scaling is selected, the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV uses the minimum and maximum values of the available measurement cycle to automatically determine a suitable value range for the graph to be displayed. This scaling is determined once and retained until the autoscale function is triggered again. If manual scaling is required, the upper and lower end value of the Y-axis must be entered in the two fields. If a linear unit has been selected for the Y-axis, this axis can be displayed with linear or logarithmic subdivisions. 1146.2078.62 3.63 E-5 Measurement Displays R&S UPV Gridlines The settings Main Grid and Sub Grid are used to subdivide the graph with horizontal gridlines. Main gridlines which are labeled on the Y-axis with the associated numeric values can be added with different intervals. Subgridlines are used for further subdivisions; these lines are not labeled. Limits Lower and/or upper limits can be defined for each trace; these limits can be different or the same for the two traces. The limits can be fixed preset values; however, values measured at a different location or entire scans from files, from the other measurement channel and so on can also be used automatically as limits / limit curves. If the limits are activated, each measurement value is compared with the limits. Limit overranging (additionally highlighted here with circles) Limit line Max value curve Measurement value curve Min value curve Limit display 1146.2078.62 3.64 E-5 R&S UPV Measurement Displays Limit curves appear as a red line on the graph. Each measurement value which violates a limit is highlighted by a red dot on the curve. In addition, a red arrow pointing up/down in the bottom right-hand corner of the graph provides a permanent indication of limit overranging/underranging. Limit monitoring is reset each time the pressed. START key is Limit monitoring can also be reset using a softkey; see the section "Restart Min/Max, Lim Viol function" on page 3.81. Extreme values If this tick box is activated, the lowest and highest measurement value is displayed. Two additional grey lines which represent the measured extreme values (see the example above) then appear in the graph. Extreme value recording is reset each time the START key is pressed. Extreme value recording can also be reset using a softkey; see the section "Restart Min/Max, Lim Viol function" on page 3.81. 1146.2078.62 3.65 E-5 Measurement Displays R&S UPV Settings for the X-axis The quantity displayed on the X-axis is normally determined by the type of measurement; it can be seen in the display field shown opposite. Units for the X-axis The units available in the parameter list depend in the type of measurement. An overview of all units used with the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV and their conversion formulae can be found at the end of this chapter (section "Units" from page 3.110 onwards). Usually it is the used unit that is displayed on the X-axis of the graph. Sometimes it is better to use a label defined by the user; this label can be entered in the parameter field. Details concerning the numeric value display can be specified here for all linear units. For example, it is possible to select whether frequency is to be given in Hz, mHz, kHz, and so on. If "Auto" is set, these unit prefixes are automatically adapted to the measurement value. With Label Auto, the X-axis of the graph can be labeled with the data name selected under X-Axis, or users can define their own label in the entry field. Reference values A reference value can be set here for labels of X-values with relative units. 1146.2078.62 3.66 E-5 R&S UPV Measurement Displays X-axis scaling If automatic scaling is selected, the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV uses the minimum and maximum values defined for the measurement, e.g. by the start/stop values of a sweep, by the measurement bandwidth of an FFT analysis, and so on. If manual scaling has been selected, the upper and lower end value of the X-axis must be entered in the two fields. If a linear unit has been selected for the X-axis, this axis can be displayed with linear or logarithmic subdivisions. Gridlines The settings Main Grid and Sub Grid are used to subdivide the graph with vertical gridlines. Main gridlines which are labeled on the X-axis with the associated numeric values can be added with different intervals. Subgridlines are used for further subdivisions; these lines are not labeled. 1146.2078.62 3.67 E-5 Measurement Displays R&S UPV X- and Y-value display The Resolution field is used set how many digits the values on the X and Y-axis and at the cursor are to have. Values in linear units can be displayed with 3 to 7 digits; values in logarithmic units can be displayed with a resolution of 0.1 dB to 0.00001 dB. Loading and saving traces / scans The current trace together with all scans can be saved in these parameter fields by calling up the file directory using the ••• button (for details see the section "File Management" on page 3.102). Here, saved traces together with all of their scans can be loaded and displayed in the current graph by calling up the file directory using the ••• button (details are given in the section "File Management" on page 3.102). On a graph, it is possible to replace individual scans with saved scans; it is also possible to add (append) additional saved scans. Once again, this is done by calling up the file directory using the ••• button (details are given in the section "File Management" on page 3.102). 1146.2078.62 3.68 E-5 R&S UPV Measurement Displays Evaluating Graphical Displays with Cursors and Markers All graphical displays can be evaluated using horizontal and vertical cursors; the X and Y-values shown in the display fields associated with the cursors are always current values. Markers are used to identify important measurement points. The cursors and markers can only be operated using the softkey bar; the softkeys can be operated from the front panel, using the keys F5 to F12 on the external PC keyboard or by clicking with the mouse. As an alternative and in a slightly different way to operation via the panels, the softkeys can also be used to scale the graphs or to zoom sections of the displays. The basic settings in these functions are described here using examples. A detailed description of the display options can be found in Chapter 4 "Graphical Display". Addit. cursor values Cursor Y-value Marker Horizontal cursor Vertical cursor Harmonic marker Cursor X-value As soon as the graphical window has the focus, the softkey bar for operating the graphical elements is shown at the bottom of the screen. The softkeys are arranged in several levels; the lower levels are accessed by actuating the respective button. Actuating the Back button redisplays the higher level. The level currently displayed is indicated in the info line above the softkey. The desired function is executed by actuating the buttons displayed in the lowest level. 1146.2078.62 3.69 E-5 Measurement Displays R&S UPV Showing and hiding traces – Trace function � Actuating the Trace button opens another softkey level. The two buttons Show A and Show B are used to show and hide the associated trace. These buttons only affect the curve display; the measurement values are retained in the background even when the curve is hidden, and can be used as reference values, for example. Scaling graph – Autoscale function � Actuating the Autoscale button opens another softkey level. The softkeys available here are used to rescale the selected axes (if required, it is also possible to rescale the axes for certain traces only). The action triggered with these buttons corresponds to that of the Autoscale button for the X and Y-axis in the associated configuration panels. The All button scales both the X and Y-axis simultaneously. 1146.2078.62 3.70 E-5 R&S UPV Measurement Displays Operating the cursors � Actuating the Cursor button displays the cursor softkeys: The Audio Analyzer R&S UPV uses two cursors which are identified by the and symbols indicate the measured point in the graph (see the example graph above). symbols. These Only one cursor is active and can be moved in the graph at any one time. The active cursor is displayed with a solid line; the inactive cursor is displayed with a broken line. The <-> button is used to activate the and -cursor alternately. Alternatively, the Enter key or a rotary-knob click can also be used to toggle between the two cursors. The two buttons -Cursor and -Cursor activate the associated cursor and display the next softkey level. The two buttons Set Cursor and Set Cursor open the next softkey level where the associated cursor can be set to certain values, e.g. maximum, minimum, etc. This button is used to display a further level. A large selection of differential values can be displayed using the softkeys on this level. 1146.2078.62 3.71 E-5 Measurement Displays If, for example, the cursor was activated with the R&S UPV -Cursor button, the following softkeys appear: Here a softkey with an additional tick box is used. The softkey indicates that the -cursor is active and that further settings for this cursor are available under the adjacent softkeys. Activating/deactivating the tick box shows/hides the cursor in the graph. The two buttons Vert A and Vert B activate vertical cursors and place them on TRACE A and TRACE B. Both the cursor and its label fields are displayed in the color of the associated trace. Actuating the Vert A-B button displays a grey cursor which represents the difference between the values for TRACE A and TRACE B. The two buttons Hor A and Hor B activate horizontal cursors and place them on TRACE A and TRACE B. Both the cursor and its label fields are displayed in the color of the associated trace. The Movement button opens the next softkey level where it is possible to set how the cursor is moved with the rotary knob (see the next section). The second line of the label shows the currently set step size in brackets. 1146.2078.62 3.72 E-5 R&S UPV Measurement Displays Moving cursor Only one cursor is active and can be moved in the graph at any one time. The active cursor is displayed with a solid line; the inactive cursor is displayed with a broken line. The <-> button is used to activate the and -cursor alternately. Alternatively, the Enter key or a rotary-knob click can also be used to toggle between the two cursors. In the case of operation using the mouse, the desired cursor or one of its display fields can be activated and moved by simply clicking with the mouse. A cursor can be moved in a number of different ways: • • • The active cursor is linked to the rotary knob and can be moved directly using the rotary knob. On the external PC keyboard, the keys TAB / CTRL + TAB move the cursor to the right / left. In the case of operation using the mouse, the cursor can be clicked and moved by holding down the mouse key. The step size with which a cursor is moved can be set using softkeys. To do so, the softkey of the desired or -cursor must first be selected: The Movement button opens the next softkey level where various step sizes for moving the cursor are offered irrespective of the graph currently being used. This is described in greater detail below. The currently selected step size is indicated in brackets in the second label line of the Movement button. 1146.2078.62 3.73 E-5 Measurement Displays R&S UPV Sweep graph: If the Next Pixel button is selected, the cursor is moved in the graph by one pixel with each increment (rotary knob, mouse or TAB key). If in the graphical display there is not a measurement value at every pixel (because only a few measurement points were recorded relative to the size of the displayed graph), the cursor value is interpolated linearly at the pixels between the measurement values. If in the graph the number of recorded measurement points is greater than the number of pixels available for display, the largest measurement value in each case is displayed at the corresponding pixel with X and Y-value. If the Next Step button is selected, the cursor is moved to the next measurement value with each increment (rotary knob, mouse or TAB key). The cursor is therefore moved in smaller or larger steps depending on the number of measurement points. If the graph is displayed relatively small or the number of recorded measurement values displayed is greater than the number of pixels available in the graphical field, the cursor sometimes does not appear to move (it remains on the same pixel). However, the associated display fields always show the currently selected measurement point with X and Y-value. If the Next Peak button is selected, the cursor is moved to the next measured peak with each increment (rotary knob, mouse or TAB key). 1146.2078.62 3.74 E-5 R&S UPV Measurement Displays FFT graph: If the Next Pixel button is selected, the cursor is moved in the graph by one pixel with each increment (rotary knob, mouse or TAB key). With FFT analyses, the number of recorded measurement points (bins) is usually much greater than the number of pixels available for display in the graph; the cursor then indicates the bin with the largest measurement value at the pixel in question and displays this bin with its X and Yvalues. If the Next Bin button is selected, the cursor is moved to the next measured bin with each increment (rotary knob, mouse or TAB key). Since with FFT analyses the number of recorded measurement points (bins) is usually much greater than the number of pixels available for display, the cursor sometimes does not appear to move (it remains on the same pixel). However, the associated display fields always show the currently selected measurement point with X and Y-value. If the Next Peak button is selected, the cursor is moved to the next measured peak with each increment (rotary knob, mouse or TAB key). If the Next Harmonic button is selected, the cursor is moved to the next marked harmonic with each increment (rotary knob, mouse or TAB key). This button is also available if the harmonic marker is not active (see the next section "Operating the markers"). In this case, the button activates the harmonic marker. 1146.2078.62 3.75 E-5 Measurement Displays R&S UPV Waveform: If the Next Pixel button is selected, the cursor is moved in the graph by one pixel with each increment (rotary knob, mouse or TAB key). If in the graphical display there is not a measurement value at every pixel (because only a few measurement points were recorded relative to the size of the displayed graph), the cursor value is interpolated linearly at the pixels between the measurement values. If in the graph the number of recorded measurement points is greater than the number of pixels available for display, the largest measurement value in each case is displayed at the corresponding pixel with X and Y-value. If the Next Sample button is selected, the cursor is moved to the next measurement value with each increment (rotary knob, mouse or TAB key). If the graph is displayed relatively small or the number of recorded measurement values (samples) displayed is greater than the number of pixels available in the graphical field, the cursor sometimes does not appear to move (it remains on the same pixel). However, the associated display fields always show the currently selected measurement point with X and Y-value. 1146.2078.62 3.76 E-5 R&S UPV Measurement Displays Bargraph: Only the Next Value setting is available here; the cursor moves to the next measured distortion point (harmonic or intermodulation product) with each increment (rotary knob, mouse or TAB key). This button does not open a further softkey level; actuating the Movement softkey displays the step size without further settings being made. All of the step-size settings for cursor movement described here only affect the currently selected cursor and are only applicable in the selected graphical window. This means that when a different cursor is activated or a different graphical window is selected, the cursor is moved using the settings applicable there. The selected step size applies equally to vertical and horizontal cursors. Function Front panel PC keyboard Mouse Move cursor Activate desired cursor via softkeys and move using rotary knob. Activate desired cursor via softkeys and move using keys TAB and CTRL + TAB. Click desired cursor or associated display field and move cursor with mouse key held down. Select active cursor via softkey Actuate <-> softkey; this softkey toggles between and -cursor. Press F5 function key for <-> softkey; this softkey toggles between and cursor. Click desired cursor or one of its display fields. Select active cursor via Enter function If desired graph has focus, ENTER key or rotary-knob click toggles between both cursors. If desired graph has focus, Enter key toggles between both cursors. Click desired cursor or one of its display fields. 1146.2078.62 3.77 E-5 Measurement Displays R&S UPV Cursor in traces with several scans If a trace consists of several scans, the cursors only move along one scan and indicate the X and Y-values of this scan. The scan number displayed in the bottom left-hand corner of the graph in the respective display field indicates which scan is being analyzed. In order to analyze individual scans with cursors, the cursor is switched to the desired scan in the following way: • • • keys Front panel: with the External PC keyboard: with the keys ALT + PAGE UP and ALT + PAGE DOWN Mouse: by clicking the "Scan" field shown above 1146.2078.62 3.78 E-5 R&S UPV Measurement Displays Operating the markers � Actuating the Marker button displays the marker softkeys: The user must then first select the trace on which a marker is to be set. The next softkey level appears simultaneously: The two buttons Set to -Cursor and Set to Cursor set the marker to the value of the currently selected cursor. The Track to Max button is used to set a marker at the maximum value of the curve. If the maximum value changes, the marker is set at the new maximum value. The Harmonics button marks harmonics of the frequency indicated by the marker. If no marker has been set, actuating the Harmonics button sets the marker to the maximum value of the trace and calculates and marks the harmonics from this frequency. The Off button deactivates the marker and indication of the harmonics. 1146.2078.62 3.79 E-5 Measurement Displays R&S UPV Zooming the graph � Actuating the Zoom button displays the zoom functions. The Act Curs In button zooms in on the section of graph on either side of the active X-cursor. The Act Curs Out button zooms out from the section of graph on either side of the active Xcursor. The Betw V Curs or Betw H Curs button zooms in on the area between the two X or Y-cursors. The zoomed display is fitted to the size of the set graph. The Unzoom button restores the original axis, i.e. undoes all of the zoom operations performed. The Undo button undoes the zoom operation last performed. The Autoscale button displays the next softkey level. The softkeys available here are used to rescale the selected axes (if required, it is also possible to rescale the axes for certain traces only). The action triggered with this button corresponds to that of the Autoscale button in the associated configuration panels, as described in the section "Scaling graph – Autoscale function" on page 3.70. 1146.2078.62 3.80 E-5 R&S UPV Measurement Displays Restart Min/Max, Lim Viol function � Actuating the Restart Min/Max, Lim Violation button displays another softkey level. If the Show Min Max function was selected in the associated configuration panel, actuating the appropriate button in the softkey bar reactivates indication of the lowest and highest measurement value. If the Lim upper or Lim lower function was selected in the associated configuration panel, actuating the appropriate button in the softkey bar reactivates limit monitoring. Config function � The Config softkey allows the user to open or close the configuration panel while operating the associated graphical window. 1146.2078.62 3.81 E-5 Measurement Displays R&S UPV Data Lists The measurement values can also be displayed in lists instead of or in combination with the graphical windows. Measurement values which have violated the preset limits are display in red. In addition, a red arrow pointing up/down in the bottom right-hand corner of the graph provides a permanent indication of limit overranging/underranging. Pressing the START key and actuating the Start Min/Max, Lim button (see "Restart Min/Max, Lim Viol function" on page 3.81) resets the limit monitoring function. Columns with measurement values Numbering of measurement values Measurement value with limit violation Cursor Limit violation indicator Display filter 1146.2078.62 3.82 E-5 R&S UPV Measurement Displays Opening data list Data lists can be opened using the associated configuration panel (see "Data Lists"). The associated graphical window is activated using the Data List button. Function Front panel PC keyboard Mouse Open data list Highlight Data List button in associated Config panel and open graphical window with ENTER key or rotaryknob click. Highlight Data List button in associated Config panel and open graphical window with Enter key. Click Data List button in associated Config panel. Data list settings The settings for configuring the data lists are made in the same panels used to configure the graphical windows: • • • • • Sweep Graph1 … 4 Config FFT Monitor Config FFT Graph 1 … 2 Config Waveform Config Bargraph1 … 2 Config The panels for configuring the data lists are opened via the menu bar; they are called up using the Disp Config button. Function Front panel PC keyboard Mouse Open panel for configuring a data list Press MENU key and highlight Disp Config button using rotary knob or cursor keys, open pulldown menu with ENTER key or rotary-knob click, and highlight and select desired panel. Press key combination CTRL + M, then highlight Disp Config button using TAB or SHIFT + TAB keys, open pulldown menu using Enter key, highlight desired panel using cursor keys and select using Enter key. Open menu bar by moving to left edge of screen, actuate Disp Config button and click desired panel. A detailed description of the setting options in these panels can be found in Chapter 4 "Graphical Display". 1146.2078.62 3.83 E-5 Measurement Displays R&S UPV A number of basic settings for the data lists are described here using examples. The measurement values displayed in the lists are always linked to the values in the result graphics. This means that all settings in the configuration panels, e.g. unit, engineering, set limits and so on, are also applied to the measurement values in the lists. The position of the cursor is also shown in the lists; the highlighted measurement number indicates the location of the cursor. Similarly, the step size of cursor movement set via the softkey bar (see the previous section) also affects the movement of the cursor in the data list. There are three ways of navigating in the lists: • As soon as a value has been highlighted in the list (blue selection frame), it is possible to use the rotary knob to move from value to value within the column. The cursor keys can also be used to move around in the lists. and are used to navigate through columns and the keys The keys navigate through rows. and to • If an external PC keyboard is used, the keys TAB / CTRL + TAB can also be used to move down/up within the column. Once again, the cursor keys � and � are used to navigate through the columns and the cursor keys and � to navigate through the rows. • If a mouse is used, you can either click the desired value or navigate using the scroll bar. As soon as the data list has the focus, softkeys appear at the bottom of the screen. The Close button closes the data list. If the Find Cursor button is actuated, the displayed section of the data list changes so that the value highlighted with the cursor is in the middle of the list. If both cursors are activated, this button is used to toggle between the two cursor values. 1146.2078.62 3.84 E-5 R&S UPV Measurement Displays Using the Selection button , it is possible to filter the list of displayed measurement values, i.e. to list only selected rows. If this button is actuated, a further softkey level appears containing softkeys for selecting the displayed values: Depending on the selected softkey, • • • • all only the values which exceed the upper, lower or both limits only harmonics or only peaks are listed in the data list. Cursor in lists with several individual scans If a trace consists of several scans, only the values of one scan can be displayed in the list at any one time. The scan number displayed in the bottom left-hand corner of the data list in the respective display field indicates which scan is entered in the list. In order to list individual scans, the desired scan is selected in the following way: • • • keys Front panel: with the External PC keyboard: with the keys ALT + PAGE UP and ALT + PAGE DOWN Mouse: by clicking the "Scan" field shown above 1146.2078.62 3.85 E-5 Settings in the Menu Bar R&S UPV Settings in the Menu Bar The menu bar of the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV is used in a similar way to other Windows® applications. The following settings are made in the menu bar: File button • To load default settings (same function as the PRESET key on the front panel, see the section "Loading and Saving Instrument Settings", page 3.106). • To load instrument settings (same function as the LOAD key on the front panel, see the section "Loading and Saving Instrument Settings", page 3.106). • To load instrument settings already prepared by Rohde & Schwarz for a broad range of typical measurements and available on the instrument as example applications; these setups are divided into various application areas (AA, AD, DD, DA) depending on whether the generator or analyzer is operated with analog or digital interfaces. • To save instrument settings under a new name or to overwrite a setup that already exists (same function as the SAVE key on the front panel, see the section "Loading and Saving Instrument Settings", page 3.106). • To exit the R&S UPV measurement program. Edit button • To cut characters, character strings, data, etc and transfer them to the clipboard. • To copy characters, character strings, data, etc to the clipboard. • To paste characters, character strings, data, etc from the clipboard. • To select characters, character strings, data, etc and transfer them to the clipboard. Screens button • 1146.2078.62 To select one of the five display options (screens), see the section "Display and Screens", page 3.12. 3.86 E-5 R&S UPV Settings in the Menu Bar Instruments button • To select the panels for configuring the generators, analyzers, filters and supplementary functions. • The desired panel must first be highlighted and is then displayed in the currently selected screen (see the section "Opening, Operating, Hiding and Closing Panels", page 3.21). • In the list, open panels are displayed without a suffix, closed panels are identified by the suffix "closed", and open minimized panels by the suffix "hidden". Disp Config button 1146.2078.62 • To select the panel used to configure the measurement display windows. • The desired panel must first be highlighted and is then displayed in the currently selected screen (see the section "Opening, Operating, Hiding and Closing Panels", page 3.21). • In the list, open panels are displayed without a suffix, closed panels are identified by the suffix "closed", and open minimized panels by the suffix "hidden". 3.87 E-5 Settings in the Menu Bar R&S UPV Displays button • To select the measurement display windows. • The desired measurement window must first be highlighted and is then displayed in the currently selected screen (see the section "Opening, Operating, Hiding and Closing Panels", page 3.21). • In the list, open windows are displayed without a suffix, closed windows are identified by the suffix "closed", and open minimized windows by the suffix "hidden". Sequence button 1146.2078.62 • To select sequences (macros) used to automate previously programmed measurement procedures to start. • To record remote-control commands used to simplify the creation of measurement programs (see Chapter 5, "Remote Control – Basics"). 3.88 E-5 R&S UPV Settings in the Menu Bar Utilities button A series of settings for configuring the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV are grouped under this button: • To install software options. • To set the remote-control interface (see Chapter 5). • To perform service functions. • To set the Quick Launch Config function. • To define whether the menu bar and the tool bar should always be visible on the screen or only when the mouse pointer is moved to the left-hand edge (for menu bar) or right-hand edge (for tool bar) of the screen (see below). • To define the form of the file selector (see section "File Management"). Windows button • To cascade all open panels / measurement windows. • To tile all open panels / windows. • To display and select all panels / measurement windows which are open and displayed in the current screen. Help button • 1146.2078.62 To call up the help system of the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV (see the section "Help System", page 3.99).To call up information about the firmware version installed on the instrument. 3.89 E-5 Settings in the Menu Bar R&S UPV Utilities button, "Always visible" setting The Audio Analyzer R&S UPV allows you to have the menu bar and/or the tool bar displayed at the top edge or at the right-hand edge of the screen all the time. This feature is primarily for operation with the mouse. Menu bar: If the Menu Bar box is not activated, the menu bar appears at the top edge of the screen as soon as you move the mouse pointer to the lefthand edge of the screen. It disappears again after a function has been selected. If the Menu Bar box is activated, the menu bar always remains visible at the top edge of the screen. Tool bar: If the Tool Bar box is not activated, the tool bar appears at the righthand edge of the screen as soon as you move the mouse pointer to this edge. The bar disappears again after a function has been selected. If the Tool Bar box is activated, the tool bar always remains visible at the top edge of the screen. 1146.2078.62 3.90 E-5 R&S UPV Settings in the Toolbar Settings in the Toolbar As with other Windows® applications, the toolbar on the R&S UPV audio analyzer uses symbols that perform functions when clicked with the mouse. These are mainly functions that are also available as keys on the front panel of the R&S UPV model. The symbols simplify operation with the mouse and can thus also be used with the R&S UPV66 model. The following functions are offered: 1146.2078.62 • Corresponds to the START key on the front panel of the R&S UPV model. • Starts continuous measurements or sweeps. • Resets MIN/MAX values for bargraph displays, averaging for measurement results, and limit overranging. • Corresponds to the SINGLE key on the front panel of the R&S UPV model. • Starts a single measurement or a single sweep. • Corresponds to the STOP CONT key on the front panel of the R&S UPV model. • Measurement/sweep is stopped or continued (toggle function). • Corresponds to the HCOPY key on the front panel of the R&S UPV model. • Depending on the settings under Utilities, printout of the screen contents on the connected printer is started or the screen contents are stored in a file. • Corresponds to the OUTPUT OFF key on the front panel of the R&S UPV model. • Switches all outputs of the measuring instrument off or on again (toggle function). • Corresponds to the LOAD key on the front panel of the R&S UPV model. • Opens a panel for storing predefined instrument settings. 3.91 E-5 Settings in the Toolbar R&S UPV • Corresponds to the SAVE key on the front panel of the R&S UPV. • Opens a panel for storing instrument settings. • Selects the appropriate display window (screen), where the colors used have the following meaning: • The currently selected visible display window is indicated in green. • All screens in which windows are activated are indicated in yellow. • Blank display windows are indicated in grey. • Symbols for conveniently loading predefined instrument settings or for starting macros by means of the mouse. The required settings are described in the following section. … … … Utilities button, "Quick Launch Config…" setting In the toolbar, you can define up to eight icons that either load setups or execute macros when clicked with the mouse. You can determine these functions in the Quick Launch Config… window. 1146.2078.62 3.92 E-5 R&S UPV Settings in the Toolbar • If this check box is enabled, the corresponding setup or macro can be performed by means of the LOCAL key on the front panel. • In this column, you can define icons however you want. You can do this by using the symbols (S1 to S8 or M1 to M8), which are standard on the instrument and can be found in the C:\UPV\Config\res directory. However, you can also use any other icon. The only requirements are that the icon has a size of 20 x 20 pixels and that it is available as a BMP file on the hard disk of the R&S UPV. Clicking the button with the mouse opens the File Selector, where you can select the icon file you want. • In these text lines, you can enter comments to describe the individual setup/macro. • In the command column, you can select the setup/macro that is to be activated with the symbol. The easiest way to do this is to button with the mouse, whereupon the File click the Selector is opened, making it possible to select the required file. 1146.2078.62 3.93 E-5 Settings in the Operating System R&S UPV Settings in the Operating System The R&S UPV uses the WindowsXP operating system. Settings at system level are only rarely required, e.g. installation of a new printer driver. Connecting a keyboard and mouse makes Windows easier to use. Auxiliaries Panel A number of supplementary functions can be selected in the Auxiliaries panel. It is divided into the following sections: • Audio Monitor, for configuring the audio-monitoring functions • Anlg Aux Out, the auxiliary analog output at the rear of the R&S UPV can be configured here • Trigger In / Out, for configuring the trigger inputs and outputs at the rear of the instrument Audio Monitor Function The audio monitoring output (integrated loudspeaker or headphone connection) permits audio monitoring of analog or digital input signals both directly at the input of the Audio Analyzer R&S UPV and at the various analysis levels after any filters that may be active. Audio monitoring of the generator signal is also possible. If the R&S UPV-U2 option is installed, the signal of the headphone output is also available at two BNC connectors on the instrument's rear panel. The required settings are made in the Auxiliaries panel; the settings described here are intended as examples. A detailed description of the options can be found in Chapter 4 "Instrument Functions". 1146.2078.62 3.94 E-5 R&S UPV Auxiliaries Panel These tick boxes are used to operate the audio monitoring function. • Audio Monitor switches the loudspeaker or the headphones on/off. This function corresponds to the loudpeaker ON key on the front panel of the instrument. • Speaker enable and Phone enable are used to preselect which of the two components the on/off function described above applies to. • If installed, the R&S UPV-U2 option is connected in parallel to the headphone output; these BNC connectors are therefore switched on and off just like the jack. • If the Phone/Aux box is activated, the headphone output and, if installed, the BNC connectors (R&S UPV-U2 option) remain permanently activated. The ON key only affects the loudspearker. This "permanent" setting is very useful, for example, if you connect an oscilloscope on which the signal is to be continuously monitored and the loudspeaker is to remain selectable at the same time. The Signal Source field is used to select which signal is to be monitored. This can be the measurement signal switched to the analysis path either in the input level, monitor level or function level, i.e. with or without filtering. Alternatively, the generator signal can also be monitored. The individual levels of the analyzer are explained in greater detail in the section "Function blocks and measurement levels" on page 3.5. Either the signal of a single channel (Mono) or the stereo signal can be applied at the audio monitoring output. If Both is set, both channels are separately available at the two headphone outputs; the loudspeaker outputs the signal from both channels. If the R&S UPV-U2 option is installed, the same applies to the two BNC connectors, which are then available. 1146.2078.62 3.95 E-5 Auxiliaries Panel R&S UPV The volume at the loudspeaker or connected headphones can be set in two ways: • By entering or changing the numeric value in the associated field of the panel (permitted range: 0 dB to -120 dB). • Pressing the volume key on the front of the instrument opens a window containing a volume control which can be operated directly using the rotary knob, the cursor and or using the mouse. The ENTER keys function or pressing the volume key again confirms the setting and closes the window. Warning: The output voltage of the built-in headphones amplifier is influenced by the incoming signal, by instrument settings such as the selected measurement range and test function, as well as by the set volume. If the volume is set to maximum, the headphones amplifier may generate high output voltages with an RMS value of up to 8 V. Depending on the headphones' sensitivity, this may produce very high sound pressure levels that may cause hearing damage. To monitor varying input signals, therefore, it is advisable to reduce the volume and take off the headphones until the signal has settled. Auxiliary Analog Output An auxiliary analog output for the following special applications is provided at the rear of the R&S UPV: • Output of a DC signal, e.g. for supplying power to hearing aids • Auxiliary output for the analog generator signal via an integrated amplifier for the direct actuation of small loudspeakers • Output for single-channel audio monitoring Details are given in Chapter 4 "Instrument Functions". 1146.2078.62 3.96 E-5 R&S UPV Auxiliaries Panel Trigger Input, Trigger Output A trigger input and trigger output for the following applications are provided at the rear of the R&S UPV: • Input for triggering measurements • Output for a measurement-event-dependent signal that can be used to trigger external instruments / circuits • Alternatively, clock signals can also be output at the TRIG OUT socket Details are given in Chapter 4 "Instrument Functions". 1146.2078.62 3.97 E-5 Rapid Deactivation of the Outputs R&S UPV Rapid Deactivation of the Outputs In the event of faults, the outputs of the R&S UPV can be deactivated by pressing the Output OFF key. This means the following: • • The levels of all digital outputs are set to 0 V The levels of all analog outputs are set to 0 V; the outputs remain terminated (i.e. the impedance is retained) The deactivated lines can only be reactivated by pressing the OUTPUT OFF key again. Specialty Anlg Aux Output: If DC is selected as signal source in the Anlg Aux Out line in the Auxiliaries panel, the DC voltage indicated in the line below will be retained even if you press the Output OFF key. This ensures the supply voltage or the operation point is retained when a device under test (DUT) is connected. The status of the key is indicated by an LED. Illumination of the LED means OUTPUT OFF. In order to protect the analyzer input, the generator output is also deactivated automatically if the analyzer inputs are overloaded (input voltage at 300 or 600 is higher than 25 V), and the OUTPUT OFF LED lights up as if the OUTPUT OFF key has been pressed. After the analyzer inputs have been overloaded in this way, measurements can be resumed provided that the overvoltage has been rectified or the input impedance has been switched to 200 k . Remote-control command: OUTPut ON | OFF 1146.2078.62 3.98 E-5 R&S UPV Help System Help System The R&S UPV has a context-sensitive help system. The help system provides a help page for every parameter and can be called up at any time while the instrument is being operated. The help system has a navigation bar, i.e. starting from the context-sensitive page it is possible to move to other help pages using the contents list, the index, scroll arrows and page-internal links. In addition to the context-sensitive help, online help for all functions of the R&S UPV is compiled on the supplied CD-ROM. This help can be called up on any computer using the Internet Explorer (version 4.0 and higher). Operating Help The Help window is divided into three areas. On the left-hand side is a column that displays either the entire help contents list or the index. To the right of that is a large area showing the current help page and, if necessary, a vertical scrollbar. This area can also be moved up or down with the rotary knob. The bottom of the window contains several buttons for operating the help system. Note: If the left-hand area containing the contents list or the index is activated, you can use the letter keys to go directly to the desired first letters in the area. 1146.2078.62 3.99 E-5 Help System R&S UPV You can use the rotary knob to move the blue highlighting. Clicking the rotary knob activates the highlighted segment, and its color changes to gray. Pressing the ESC key deactivates the segment, and you can use the rotary knob again to move the highlighting. The bottom of the window contains several buttons for operating the help system. These buttons can be operated using the mouse or the buttons: Go to Index This button changes the display on the left-hand side to the index. You also use this button to return to the contents list; the button is then called "Go to Content". Find Back If you navigate in the online help by activating links, actuating this button returns you to the previous page. Scroll Left Sometimes the help pages are too wide to fit completely in the display. In this case, a horizontal scrollbar is displayed. You can then use these buttons to scroll horizontally without losing the input focus. Scroll Right Zoom In This button makes the help display larger. Zoom Out This button makes the help display smaller. The advantage of using these buttons is that the appropriate help area is always activated, allowing you to work smoothly. Help Text Language Both the context-sensitive help and the online help are available in English and German. The language of the help texts can be set under the Utilities button on the menu bar. Help Language 1146.2078.62 Selects the language in which the online help is to be displayed. English The online help is displayed in English. Deutsch The online help is displayed in German. 3.100 E-5 R&S UPV Help System Overview of operating the context-sensitive help system Function Front panel PC keyboard Mouse Open help Press HELP key. Press F1 key. --- Close help Press HELP key again. Press F1 key again. --- Activate link Highlight link using rotary knob or arrow keys and activate with rotary-knob click or ENTER key. Highlight link using cursor keys and activate with Enter key. Click link. Scroll through help Highlight Previous or Next in help window using cursor keys and activate with rotaryknob click or ENTER key. Highlight Previous or Next in help window using cursor keys and activate with Enter key. Click Previous or Next. Change size of text Use the Zoom In and Zoom Out softkeys to set the desired size. Use the F11 (Zoom In) and F12 (Zoom Out) keys to set the desired size. Use the Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons to set the desired size. Switch to index Go to Index softkey switches to index or back to contents list. F5 (Go to Index) key switches to index or back to contents list. Go to Index button switches to index or back to contents list. Scroll horizontally Use the Scroll Left and Scroll Right softkeys. Use the F9 (Scroll Left) and F10 (Scroll Right) keys. Use the Scroll Left and Scroll Right buttons. Select item from contents list Press Focus button below contents list. Highlight desired item using rotary knob or cursor keys and then press rotary knob or ENTER key. Highlight Focus button below contents list using cursor keys and activate with Enter key. Highlight desired item using cursor keys and then press Enter key. Click item. Press Focus button below index. Type desired term in entry field and then press rotary knob or ENTER key or highlight item using rotary knob or cursor keys and then press rotary knob or ENTER key. Highlight Focus button below index using cursor keys and activate with Enter key. Type desired term in entry field and press Enter key or highlight item using cursor keys and press Enter key. Click item. Press MENU key and highlight Utilities button using rotary knob or cursor keys, open pulldown menu with ENTER key or rotaryknob click, highlight and select Config Panel button, and highlight and select desired language in Help Language item in next level. Press key combination CTRL + M, then highlight Utilities button using keys TAB or SHIFT + TAB, open pulldown menu with Enter key, highlight Config Panel button using cursor keys, select with Enter key and highlight desired language in Help Language item in next level using cursor keys and select with Enter key. Click top of screen to open menu bar, actuate Utilities button, click Config Panel button and click desired language in Help Language item in next level. Help page for selected parameter is displayed. Help opens linked page. Help page for selected item is displayed. Select index item Help page for selected item is displayed. Select help text language 1146.2078.62 3.101 E-5 File Management R&S UPV File Management The R&S UPV uses files to store all instrument data, i.e. system and user data. User data includes stored instrument settings, data for equalizer files, lists for sweeps, and so on. The files are stored on the instrument's hard disk. The D:\ drive is available for storing user-defined data and can have any number of directory structures. A number of default directories are preconfigured; they can ,however, be changed at any time. The C:\ drive is a protected system drive. The files on this drive contain data which should not be modified. This drive should therefore not be accessed, otherwise reconstruction of the system partition will not be possible without loss of data. To prevent system files from being deleted or overwritten inadvertently, the C:\ drive is not displayed in the File menu. It can be accessed by disabling a protection level (see Protection Level in the Setup menu). Files can be transferred either using a USB stick or via a connected network. The USB stick is inserted into one of the USB interfaces and is assigned the drive letter F:\. If the instrument is connected to a network, all network drives for which the user has access authorization are also available (see Chapter 1, section Accessing Directories in the Network, page 1.41.The files are distinguished by their extension; each file type has a certain content. Normally, the extension is of no importance to the user since the files are accessed in the associated panels where only the relevant file type is available. For example, the files with equalizer settings can only be loaded in the Generator Function and Analyzer Function panels if the appropriate function settings have been made. To load loaded settings or to store results, the File Manager must be called up using the ••• button in the respective panel; a File Select window then appears. 1146.2078.62 3.102 E-5 R&S UPV File Management Selecting the File Select Window You can select between two fundamentally different types of the File Select window. You can set the style you wish to have by using the Utilities button in the menu bar. • Windows Style: The File Select window known from Windows is used to select files. This makes for very convenient operation when using the mouse, but operation via the front panel is very restricted. • UPV Style: The R&S UPV uses its integrated File Select window to select files. This window is fully operable via the front panel and allows you, for example, to enter file names via the number keys as on a mobile phone. File Selector 1146.2078.62 Selects the style in which the File Select window is to be displayed. ON The R&S UPV displays the File Select window known from Windows ("Windows Style"). OFF The R&S UPV displays the integrated File Select window ("UPV Style"). 3.103 E-5 File Management R&S UPV Integrated File Select Window The File Select window has several sections. The files last used are listed in the top section Recent Data Sets; a maximum of ten files are displayed. The available drives and directories are shown underneath on the left-hand side, and the files in the selected directory are shown on the right-hand side. The currently selected path is displayed above the window. Only the relevant files (without file extensions) are shown. If several files are opened, the path selected last is displayed. Any file name can be used when saving and creating files; the file extension is, however, assigned automatically and cannot be entered. The file is saved on the selected path. This panel is operated in the same way as other panels, whereby each section of the File Select window is treated as a separate panel: The rotary knob or cursors are used to highlight the desired section and the entry focus is moved to this section by pressing the rotary knob or the Enter key. The rotary knob and up/down cursors then only navigate within this section. The left/right cursor can be used to toggle between the directory tree and the file list. After a brief delay, the subdirectories of the selected directory are displayed to permit fast navigation in the directory tree. Pressing the ESC key moves the entry focus up again by one level. The button used to save or load the file can be highlighted and actuated. After the desired operation has been completed, e.g. selection of the file, the menu is closed automatically. • Loading file: Highlight the file and load by pressing the rotary knob or actuating the Select button/softkey. • Saving file: Enter the file name in the File Name: field. Highlight the directory in which the file is to be saved and then actuate the Save button/softkey. • Creating file: Enter the file name in the File Name: field. Highlight the directory in which the file is to be saved and then actuate the Create button/softkey. The created file is empty; it has to be filled with the desired values using the associated editor. 1146.2078.62 3.104 E-5 R&S UPV File Management File Manager The File Manager is used to perform general file management tasks, such as copying, moving, renaming and deleting files and creating new directories. It can also be used to save externally created files in the R&S UPV by copying them from a USB stick, from a CD ROM or from a network to the internal hard disk. The File Manager can be called up in all panels in which files can be loaded. It is called up using the File Manager… button in the File Select window. Additionally, it is also possible to call up the File Manager via the menu bar. The file types which are to be displayed can be selected in the File Type section at the top of the File Manager. All files (All Files (*:*)) or specific file types (e.g. Waveforms (*.wav)) can be selected. A list of file types is given in the panel at the end of this section. The available drives and directories are shown underneath on the left-hand side, and the files in the selected directory are shown on the right-hand side. The currently selected path is displayed above the window. If several files are opened, the path selected last is displayed. Unlike the File Select window, the File Manager displays the complete file name including the extension. The buttons/softkeys trigger the assigned action, e.g. copying, moving or deleting the highlighted file. In addition, it is possible to create a new directory in the level below the highlighted directory. The File Manager is operated in the same way as other panels, whereby each section of the File Manager is treated as a separate panel: The rotary knob or cursors are used to highlight the desired section and the entry focus is moved to this section by pressing the rotary knob or the Enter key. The rotary knob and up/down cursors then only navigate within this section. The left/right cursor can be used to toggle between the directory tree and the file list. After a brief delay, the subdirectories of the selected directory are displayed to permit fast navigation in the directory tree. Pressing the ESC key moves the entry focus up again by one level. The buttons/softkeys can be selected and actuated. • Moving file: Highlight the file and then actuate the Cut button/softkey. Highlight the directory to which the file is to be moved and then actuate the Paste button/softkey. If a file with the same name already exists in the target directory, a confirmation query appears which the user must acknowledge before the file is overwritten. • Copying file: Highlight the file and then actuate the Copy button/softkey. Highlight the directory to which the file is to be copied and then actuate the Paste button/softkey. If a file with the same name already exists in the target directory, a confirmation query appears which the user must acknowledge before the file is overwritten. • Renaming file: Highlight the file and then actuate the Rename button/softkey. A window opens in which the new file name can be entered. Enter the name and press the Enter key. If a file with the same name already exists, a confirmation query appears which the user must acknowledge before the file is overwritten. • Deleting file: Highlight the file and then actuate the Delete button/softkey. A confirmation query then appears which the user must acknowledge before the file is deleted. • Creating a new directory: Highlight the drive or directory level under which the new directory is to be created, and then actuate the Create New Directory button/softkey. A window opens in which the new directory name can be entered. Enter the name and press the Enter key. 1146.2078.62 3.105 E-5 File Management R&S UPV Loading and Saving Instrument Settings Instrument settings are loaded and saved in the same way as described for loading and saving files in the previous section. The File Select window is opened using the File button in the menu bar. Instrument settings can also be loaded/saved directly using the LOAD / SAVE keys on the front of the instrument. Pressing these keys opens the File Select window. Every Audio Analyzer R&S UPV has a range of instrument settings which have been prepared by Rohde & Schwarz for a broad selection of typical measurements and which are available on the instrument as example setups. These setups are divided into various application areas (AA, AD, DD, DA) depending on whether the generator or analyzer is operated with analog or digital interfaces. This allows users to make settings for their own specific measurement tasks very simply by modifying these example setups. All of these example settings can be found in the Applications directory. The default factory presettings are also available on every R&S UPV. These can be called up directly using the File button on the menu bar or by pressing the PRESET key on the front of the instrument. 1146.2078.62 3.106 E-5 R&S UPV File Management List of File Extensions Used List of the user-file extensions which are assigned automatically in the R&S UPV: File type File extension Meaning Instrument settings .SET Setup file for saving and loading the instrument parameters set by the user ("complete" setup) .SAC Setup file for saving and loading the instrument parameters set by the user ("current" setup) .FTF Amplitude/frequency table for noise generation in the frequency range .VEQ Equalizer file; loaded in the "Equal File" parameter field of the Generator Function and Analyzer Function panels .SWL Sweep list for the following: Equalizer settings Sweep settings - Dwell times for automatic generator sweeps, loaded in the "Dwell File" field of the Generator Function panel - Frequency of the generator or of the selective RMS measurement; loaded in the Generator Function panel ("Freq File", "Mean Freq File", "Upper Freq File" fields) or in the Analyzer Function panel ("File Name" field) - Burst interval; loaded in the "Interval File" field of the Generator Function panel - Burst duration; loaded under the "On Time File" menu item of the Generator Function panel - Generator voltage; loaded in the "Volt File" or "Tot Volt File" field (depending on the function) of the Generator Function panel Files for data or limit lists .LIM Limit curve, loaded in the configuration panels for measurement windows under "Limit Upper" and "Limit Lower" .TRC Trace lists for measurement values, loaded in the configuration panels for measurement windows .BMP Pixel graphic Graphic files Other instrument files 1146.2078.62 .ARB Time table for generating arbitrary signals .WAV Standard format for audio signals to allow processing with PC sound cards 3.107 E-5 File Management File type R&S UPV File extension Meaning .COE Coefficient file for file-defined filters, loaded in the Filter panel in the "File Name" field .NPZ .XPZ .ZPZ Pole/zero file for file-defined filters, loaded in the Filter panel in the "File Name" field Filter files 1146.2078.62 3.108 E-5 R&S UPV Manual Remote Operation Manual Remote Operation The R&S UPV permits manual remote operation using an external computer. As a result, the audio analyzer can be operated conveniently from the user's desk even if, for example, the audio analyzer is installed in a rack in a different room. Unlike remote control where remote-control commands are used, manual remote operation requires separate Windows® software which is installed on the external computer. When launched, the Windows software Remote Desktop Connection simulates the R&S UPV user interface. This allows the instrument to be manually operated at the external computer in the same way as at the instrument itself. Manual remote operation is only possible if the audio analyzer and computer are connected via LAN and the Windows® software is installed on the computer. How to set up a connection and install the remote operation software on the external computer is described in Chapter 1 in the section Configuration for Manual Remote Operation on page 1.49 Manual remote operation is started on the external computer by calling up the Remote Desktop Connection program and clicking the Connect button. The R&S UPV must be selected as the remote operation device, i.e. its computer name must be displayed in the Computer: field. If the computer has been configured for remote operation of more than one instrument, the desired instrument can be button. The user ID and password selected from the list which is displayed by clicking the (instrument in both cases) can be stored when the software is first installed. The entries are made in the extended menu "Options>>" (see Chapter 1, section Configuration for Manual Remote Operation, page 1.49. After login, the instrument firmware of the R&S UPV boots on the external computer. After booting is completed, the audio analyzer screen appears and the R&S UPV is ready for manual remote operation from the external computer. The starting configuration is that which was active before the connection was set up. The individual functions are operated using the mouse and panel. Front panel keys which are not directly available on the panel may be replaced by key combinations (see the section "Overview of Keys" starting on page 3.118). The instrument firmware on the R&S UPV is terminated when the connection is set up. Operation at the R&S UPV itself is not possible during manual remote operation. Access by an external computer and the identity of the remote user is indicated on the login display of Windows . To enable direct operation at the R&S UPV again, the external user must first log out and then log in as the local user. The external user can log out at the external computer in the Start menu of the R&S UPV window by clicking Disconnect in the bottom right-hand corner of the menu. It is also possible to log off directly at the R&S UPV in the remote operation window. The local user must press the key combination Ctrl + Alt + Del before logging in at the remote operation screen on the R&S UPV. The default name of the local user on the R&S UPV is "instrument"; the password is also "instrument". After login, the instrument software starts with the settings used for manual remote operation. 1146.2078.62 3.109 E-5 Units R&S UPV Units There are two types of unit in the R&S UPV: • Units for measurement result display: In the configuration panels for the measurement displays, a display unit must be selected for each measurement function. This unit is then used for the measurement result displayed in the measurement display windows. The unit is selected in the Unit fields of the respective panel. • Units for value entries (e.g. reference values, frequencies, levels, etc): When data is entered, the available units are displayed on the softkeys. This allows value entries to be adopted by selecting the unit without a further entry window having to be opened. 1146.2078.62 3.110 E-5 R&S UPV Units Units in Measurement Result Displays To simplify matters: In the following conversion formulae the entry values are designated by the unit only. Example: "dBu" means "value in dBu". Units for analog level measurement results: Basic unit: Table 3-1 V Units for analog level measurement results Value in IEC/IEEE-bus notation Conversion formula V V dBV DBV 20 × lg (V) dBu DBU 20 × lg (V/0.7745967) dBm DBM 10 × lg (V2×1000/RREF) W W V2/RREF %V DPCTV (V/UREF-1)×100 V DV V-UREF V/Vr VVR V/UREF %V/Vr PCTVVR 100 × V/UREF %W DPCTW (((V2/RREF)-PREF) × 100)/PREF W DW (V2/RREF) – PREF P/Pr PPR (V2/RREF)/PREF %P/Pr PCTPPR (V2/RREF)/PREF × 100 dBr DBR 20 × lg (V/UREF) RREF = Reference impedance (Ref Imped) from Analyzer Config panel UREF = Reference level (Reference) from Config panel for measurement function PREF = (UREF) 2/RREF 1146.2078.62 3.111 E-5 Units R&S UPV Units for digital level measurement results: Basic unit: Table 3-2 FS (Full Scale) Units for digital level measurement results Value in IEC/IEEE-bus notation FS FS %FS PCTFS dBFS DBFS 20 × lg (FS) HEX FS × (2 Audiobits-1-1) for FS > 0 Hex *) Conversion formula FS×100 FS × (2 Audiobits-1-1) + (2 Audiobits-1) for FS < 0 DPCT (FS/UREF-1) × 100 dBr DBR 20 × lg (FS/UREF) LSBs LSBS FS × 2 Audiobits-1 bits BITS 1 + ld (FS × 2 Audiobits-1) % UREF = Reference level (Reference) from Config panel for measurement function *) Level measurement result in hex notation All digital analyzer measurement functions usually deliver values ranging from 0 to 1 FS. FS values >1 may occur in the following cases: • In the case of the peak measurement function with Meas Mode Peak to Peak. • In the case of a filter with gain (e.g. CCIR wtd) is used. FS values <0 may occur in the following cases: • In the case of the peak measurement function with Meas Mode Neg Peak. • In the case of the DC measurement function. Units for distortion measurement results: Basic unit: Table 3-3 % Units for distortion measurement results Value in IEC/IEEE-bus notation % PCT dB DB Conversion formula 20 × lg (% / 100) In the case of SINAD: -20 × lg (% / 100) 1146.2078.62 3.112 E-5 R&S UPV Units Unit for S/N measurement results: Table 3-4 Units for S/N measurement results Value in IEC/IEEE-bus notation Formula dB DB 20 × lg(S/N) S: N: Measurement level with activated generator Measurement level with deactivated generator Units for frequency measurement results: Basic unit: Table 3-5 Hz Units for frequency measurement results Value in IEC/IEEE-bus notation Conversion formula Hz HZ Hz DHZ Hz-FREF %Hz DPCTHZ 100 × (Hz – FREF)/FREF Toct * TOCT lg (Hz/FREF) × 9.96578 Oct OCT lg (Hz/FREF) × 3.32193 Dec DEC lg (Hz/FREF) f/fr FFR Hz/FREF *) Toct = Third octave FREF = Reference frequency (Ref Freq) from Freq Phase Config panel for frequency measurement Units for phase measurement results: Basic unit: Table 3-6 ° (degrees) Units for phase measurement results Value in IEC/IEEE-bus notation ° DEG RAD RAD ° × /180 ° DDEG ° – PREF RAD DRAD (° – PREF) × /180 PREF = Conversion formula Reference phase (Ref Phase) from Freq Phase Config panel for phase measurement 1146.2078.62 3.113 E-5 Units R&S UPV Units for group delay measurement results: Basic unit: Table 3-7 s Units for group delay measurement results Value in s IEC/IEEE-bus notation Conversion formula S DS s s – TREF TREF = Reference time (Ref Grp Del) from Freq Phase Config panel for group delay measurement Units for digital jitter measurement results: Basic unit: Table 3-8 UREF UI (unit interval) Units for digital jitter measurement results Value in IEC/IEEE-bus notation UI UI %UI PCTUI 100 × UI dBUI DBUI 20 × log (UI) ppm PPMUI 106 × UI ns NS 109 × UI /(128 × sampling frequency) dBr DBR 20 × log (UI/UREF) UIr UIR UI/UREF = Conversion formula Reference level (Reference) from Config panel for measurement function Unit for digital phase measurement results (Phase to Ref): Basic unit: Table 3-9 UI (unit interval) Units for digital phase measurement results Value in IEC/IEEE-bus notation UI UI %FRM PCTFRM °FRM DEGFRM ns NS Conversion formula 100 × UI / 128 360 × UI / 128 9 10 × UI /(128 × sampling frequency) The magnitude of jitter and phase is normally indicated in UI (unit interval). One UI corresponds to the clock period with which the digital signal is clocked (biphase clock). With digital audio signals, one UI corresponds to 128th of the sampling period. At 48 kHz, one UI is 162.76 ns. 1146.2078.62 3.114 E-5 R&S UPV Units Units for Value Entries To simplify matters: In the following conversion formulae the entry values are designated by the unit only. Example: "dBu" means "value in dBu". Table 3-10 Absolute analog level units (without reference) Conversion formulae IEC/IEEE-bus notation V, MV, UV V, mV, PV Vpp, mVpp, PVpp (peak-to-peak voltage of signal) dBu = 20 * lg (V/0.7746) V = 0.7746 * 10 (dBu/20) dBV = 20 * lg (V) V = 10 (dBV/20) dBm = 10 * lg (V2 * 1000/RREF) *) W RREF = V2/RREF = V = 10(dBm /10) * RREF / 1000 V = ( W * RREF ) VPP, MVPP, UVPP DBU DBV DBM W, MW, UW Reference impedance (Ref Imped) from the Analyzer Config panel *) In the case of the generator, the reference impedance RREF is always 600 Ohm. The IEC/IEEE-bus notation is DBMG. To calculate the open-circuit voltage Vo, the source impedance Rs (Impedance) from the Generator Config panel is also taken into account, which means that V = Vo * RREF /(Rs + RREF) is to be used in the above formula. Table 3-11 Relative analog level units (with reference) Conversion formulae IEC/IEEE-bus notation DV, DMV, DUV V = V-UREF V = V+UREF %V = (V/UREF-1) × 100 V = UREF × (1+ %V/100) DPCTV V/Vr= V/UREF V = V/Vr × UREF VVR dBr = 20 × lg (V/UREF) V = 10(dBr/20) × UREF DBR V/on= V/Burst amp[V] %on = 100 * V/Burst amp[V] dBon= 20 * lg (V/Burst amp[V]) V = V/on * Burst amp[V] V = %on * Burst amp[V]/100 V = 10 (dBon/20) * Burst amp[V] UREF = VON PCTON DBON Reference level (Ref Voltage) in V from the Generator Config panel Table 3-12 Absolute digital level units (without reference) Conversion formulae IEC/IEEE-bus notation FS Audio bits-1 bits = 1 + ld (FS × 2 ) FS = 2 %FS = 100 × FS dBFS = 20 × lg (FS) FS = %FS/100 FS = 10 (dBFS/20) LSBS = FS × 2 Audio bits-1 FS = LSBS / 2 1146.2078.62 Bits-1 3.115 /2 Audio bits-1 Audio bits-1 FS BITS PCTFS DBFS LSBS E-5 Units R&S UPV Table 3-13 Relative digital level units (with reference) Conversion formulae dBr = 20 × lg (FS/UREF) FS = 10 (dBr/20) × UREF % = 100 × (FS/UREF – 1) %on = 100 × FS/Burst amp[FS] dBon= 20 × lg (FS/Burst amp[FS]) FS = ( % / 100 + 1) × UREF FS = %on × Burst amp[FS]/100 FS =10 (dBon/20) × Burst amp[FS] UREF = IEC/IEEE-bus notation DBR DPCT PCTON DBON Reference level (Ref Voltage) in FS from the Generator Config panel Table 3-14 Absolute time units Conversion formulae s IEC/IEEE-bus notation S, MS, US min = 60 s s = min / 60 cyc = s * signal frequency s = cyc / signal frequency MIN CYC, KCYC, MCYC Table 3-15 Absolute frequency units Conversion formulae Hz, kHz IEC/IEEE-bus notation HZ, KHZ Table 3-16 Relative frequency units (with reference) Conversion formulae Hz = Hz-FREF f/fr = Hz/FREF %Hz= 100 × (Hz-FREF)/FREF IEC/IEEE-bus notation Hz = Hz+FREF DHZ, DKHZ Hz = f/fr × FREF FFR Hz = ( %Hz/100 + 1) × FREF DPCTHZ Toct = lg (Hz/FREF) × 9.96578 Hz = 2 Toct/3 × FREF Oct = lg (Hz/FREF) × 3.32193 Hz = 2 Oct × FREF OCT Dec = lg (Hz/FREF) Hz = 10 Dec × FREF DEC TOCT (Toct = Third octave) FREF = 1146.2078.62 Reference frequency (Ref Frequency) from the Generator Config panel 3.116 E-5 R&S UPV Units Table 3-17 Absolute phase units Conversion formulae IEC/IEEE-bus notation DEG ° rad = ° × (Z/180) ° = rad × (180/Z) RAD Table 3-18 Deviations (tolerance) relative to previous measurement values in settling function Conversion formulae % = (10 dB/20 -1) × 100 dB = 20 × lg (%/100 + 1) IEC/IEEE-bus notation DB, PCT Table 3-19 Step size of a logarithmic level sweep Conversion formulae MLT = 10 dB/20 dB = 20 × lg (MLT) IEC/IEEE-bus notation [MLT], DB Table 3-20 Absolute resistance unit Conversion formulae IEC/IEEE-bus notation OHM, KOHM Table 3-21 Unit for jitter Conversion formulae IEC/IEEE-bus notation UI UI %UI = 100 × UI UI = %UI / 100 PCTUI dBUI = 20 × log (UI) UI = 10 dBUI/20 DBUI ppm = 106 × UI UI = 10-6 × ppm PPMUI ns = 109 × UI /(128 × sampling frequency) UI = 128 × sampling frequency × 10-9 × ns NS Table 3-22 Unit for Phase to Ref Conversion formulae IEC/IEEE-bus notation UI UI %FRM = 100 × UI / 128 UI = 128 × %FRM / 100 PCTFRM °FRM = 360 × UI / 128 UI = 128 × °FRM / 360 DEGFRM ns = 109 × UI /(128 × sampling frequency) UI = 128 × sampling frequency × 10-9 × ns 1146.2078.62 3.117 NS E-5 Overview of Keys R&S UPV Overview of Keys The following table gives an overview of the key functions on the front panel. The table also gives the PC keyboard key combinations which can be used to trigger the functions of the keys on the front of the instrument. Details regarding mouse operation are also included in this column. The table is sorted according to the function blocks on the front panel. Key on front panel Key on PC keyboard Mouse operation Function F5 … F12 Triggers the function assigned to the softkey. Softkeys … CONTROL panel CTRL + F5 1146.2078.62 – Starts continuous measurements and sweeps – Resets the Min/Max values for bargraph displays, averaging for measurement results, and limit overranging CTRL + F6 Starts a single measurement or a single sweep CTRL + F7 Measurement / sweep is stopped or continued (toggle function) CTRL + F8 Switches the loudspeaker or connected headphones on and off (toggle function) CTRL + F9 Opens / closes the window for adjusting the audio monitoring volume CTRL + P Depending on the settings under Utilities, printout of the screen contents on the connected printer is started or the screen contents are stored in a file CTRL + F10 Stores the current settings on the hard disk and then shuts down the Windows® operating system CTRL + F11 Switches the instrument from remote operation to manual operation CTRL + F12 Switches the outputs of the measuring instrument off or on again (toggle function) 3.118 E-5 R&S UPV Key on front panel Overview of Keys Key on PC keyboard Mouse operation Function CTRL + PAGE UP Switches to the previous display setting (screen) CTRL + PAGE DOWN Switches to the next display setting (screen) CTRL + SHIFT + TAB Switches the focus to the previous panel open in the visible screen (the panel with the focus is active) CTRL + TAB Switches the focus to the next panel open in the visible screen (the panel with the focus is active) ALT + PAGE UP Changes to the previous scan in graphical displays so that, for example, measurement values can be read off using the cursor ALT * PAGE DOWN Changes to the next scan in graphical displays so that, for example, measurement values can be read off using the cursor PAGE DOWN Scrolls to the next page in tables PAGE UP Scrolls to the previous page in tables 1 p, q, r, s Entry of numeric value: 1 Entry of letters: p, q, r, s 2 t, u, v Entry of numeric value: 2 Entry of letters: t, u, v 3 w, x, y, z Entry of numeric value: 3 Entry of letters: w, x, y, z 4 g, h, i Entry of numeric value: 4 Entry of letters: g, h, i 5 j, k, l Entry of numeric value: 5 Entry of letters: j, k, l 6 m, n, o Entry of numeric value: 6 Entry of letters: m, n, o 7 Entry of numeric value: 7 Navigation keys Data entry keys 1146.2078.62 3.119 E-5 Overview of Keys Key on front panel R&S UPV Key on PC keyboard Mouse operation Function 8 a, b, c Entry of numeric value: 8 Entry of letters: a, b, c 9 d, e, f Entry of numeric value: 9 Entry of letters: d, e, f 0 SPACE Entry of numeric value: 0 Entry of a space . * ... # Entry of a dot / decimal point; entry of special characters (SHIFT +) A … Z Entry of sign; switchover between uppercase and lowercase letters CTRL + M Displays the menu bar on the screen BACKSPACE Deletes the character to the left of the cursor; undoes the action last performed ESC Closes the open panel; the old value or parameter is retained ENTER Completes the data entry (the new value is adopted); confirms and closes open entry windows VARIATION panel Click with left-hand mouse key Press mouse wheel TAB (to right) SHIFT + TAB (to left) Turn mouse wheel ENTER Moves the focus in the panels, selection windows and tables – Varies the entry value at the cursor position – Moves the active cursor in the graphical windows – Switches the measuring steps forwards and backwards for manual sweeps Pressing the rotary knob has the same effect as pressing the ENTER key UP/DOWN cursor keys 1146.2078.62 – 3.120 – Move the focus in the panels, selection windows and tables – Vary the entry value at the cursor position E-5 R&S UPV Key on front panel Overview of Keys Key on PC keyboard Mouse operation Function LEFT/RIGHT cursor keys – Move the active cursor inside the graphical windows – Move the cursor position in entered values – Switch the measuring steps forwards and backwards for manual sweeps WINDOW and SETUP panels 1146.2078.62 ALT + W Toggles between the softkey bar and the WINBAR ALT + M Opens a selection of functions on the softkey bar; these functions can be used in conjunction with the rotary knob to move or resize the active panel or graphical window ALT + H Minimizes ("hides") the active panel or graphical window ALT + C Closes the active panel or graphical window F1 Opens and closes the context-sensitive help function ALT + S Opens a panel for storing instrument settings ALT + L Opens a panel for loading predefined instrument settings ALT + P Loads the factory settings of the instrument 3.121 E-5 Overview of Panels and Measurement Displays (Graphical Windows) R&S UPV Overview of Panels and Measurement Displays (Graphical Windows) Panels which can be selected via the Instruments menu bar button: Generator Config • • • • • Selection of instrument (analog or digital interfaces) Configuration of channels Bandwidth and sampling rate Reference values Synchronization settings and wordwidth (for digital interfaces) Generator Function • • • • Selection of test signals Sweep function Frequency and level settings Filter and equalizer Analyzer Config • • • • • Selection of instrument (analog or digital interfaces) Configuration of channels Measurement bandwidth and sampling rate Reference impedance Start and trigger conditions Analyzer Function • • • • • • • • Selection of measurement functions Measurement speed and accuracy Activation of filter and equalizer Activation of Post-FFT Selection and settings for level monitor Selection and settings for input monitor Selection and settings for frequency, phase, group delay measurement Selection and settings for waveform monitor Filter • Definition of filter properties Auxiliaries Audio monitoring function • Settings for integrated loudspeaker and connected headphones • Signal source and channels • Volume • ON/OFF and volume control also possible using keys in CONTROL panel Auxiliary Analog Output • Function selection and settings Trigger Input, Trigger Output • Function selection and settings Switcher Panel • Function settings and operation of one or more connected Audio Switchers R&S UPZ Protocol Generator • Settings for the generator functions for generating the digital audio protocol of the R&S UPV-K21 option 1146.2078.62 3.122 E-5 R&S UPV Overview of Panels and Measurement Displays (Graphical Windows) Panels which can be selected via the Disp Config menu bar button: Function Config • Settings for measurement values of active measurement function in numeric display field • Settings for associated combi displays • Settings for limits, minimum values and maximum values Level Monitor Config • Settings for numeric measurement values of level monitor in numeric display field • Settings for associated combi displays • Settings for limits, minimum values and maximum values Input Config • Settings for measurement values of input monitor in numeric display field • Settings for associated combi displays • Settings for limits, minimum values and maximum values Freq / Phase Config • Settings for measurement values of frequency, phase and group delay measurement in numeric display field • Settings for associated combi displays • Settings for limits, minimum values and maximum values Sweep Graph 1…4 Config • Four of these panels are available so that up to 4 sweep graphical windows can be displayed simultaneously • Setting of all details for one-channel or two-channel graphical display of sweep functions, e.g. units, scaling, gridlines, etc • Evaluation of minimum values and maximum values • Entry of limit curves • Settings for cursors and markers FFT Graph 1…2 Config • Two of these panels are available so that up to 2 FFT graphical windows can be displayed simultaneously • Setting of all details for one-channel or two-channel display of FFT graph, e.g. units, scaling, gridlines, etc • Evaluation of minimum values and maximum values • Entry of limit curves • Settings for cursors and markers Waveform Config • Setting of all details for graphical display of waveform analyzer, e.g. number of curves, units, scaling, gridlines, etc • Entry of limit curves • Settings for cursors and markers PESQ Graph 1…2 Config 1146.2078.62 • Two of these panels are available, allowing you to display up to two PESQ windows simultaneously • Setting of all details for the display of the PESQ MOS value and the DELAY, e.g. units, scaling, gridlines, etc • Evaluation of minimum values and maximum values • Entry of limits • Settings for cursors and markers 3.123 E-5 Overview of Panels and Measurement Displays (Graphical Windows) Bargraph1…2 Config R&S UPV • Two of these panels are available so that up to 2 bargraph windows can be displayed simultaneously • Setting of all details for one-channel or two-channel display of bargraphs, e.g. units, scaling, gridlines, etc • Evaluation of minimum values and maximum values • Entry of limits • Settings for cursors and markers Measurement windows which can be selected via the Displays menu bar button: Numeric Display • Display of one-channel or two-channel measurement results of measurement function selected in Analyzer Function panel • Display of one-channel or two-channel measurement results of level monitor selected in Analyzer Function panel • Display of one-channel or two-channel measurement results of input monitor selected in Analyzer Function panel • Display of one-channel or two-channel frequency measurement results, or display of frequency measurement result and phase or group delay measurement result • The measurement results are displayed in the way defined in the configuration panel Funct Ch1…2 • These combi displays are extensions to the numeric measurement displays of the measurement function selected in the Analyzer Function panel; they show the respective numeric value plus the following additional features: • Analog bargraphs • Monitoring and display of limits • Storage of minimum and maximum values • The measurement results are displayed in the way defined in the configuration panel Lev Mon Ch1…2 • These combi displays are extensions to the numeric measurement display of the level monitor selected in the Analyzer Function panel; they show the respective numeric value plus the following additional features: • Analog bargraphs • Monitoring and display of limits • Storage of minimum and maximum values • The measurement results are displayed in the way defined in the configuration panel Input Ch1…2 • These combi displays are extensions to the numeric measurement display of the input monitor selected in the Analyzer Function panel; they show the respective numeric value plus the following additional features: • Analog bargraphs • Monitoring and display of limits • Storage of minimum and maximum values • The measurement results are displayed in the way defined in the configuration panel 1146.2078.62 3.124 E-5 R&S UPV Overview of Panels and Measurement Displays (Graphical Windows) Freq Ch1 Phase Ch2/Ch1 • These combi displays are extensions to the numeric measurement display for one-channel or two-channel frequency measurement results or for the frequency measurement result and the phase or group delay measurement result; they show the respective numeric value plus the following additional features: • Analog bargraphs • Monitoring and display of limits • Storage of minimum and maximum values • The measurement results are displayed in the way defined in the configuration panel Sweep Graph 1…4 • Up to four of these display windows can be open simultaneously to display scans from sweep measurements • One-channel or two-channel graphical display • The measurement results are displayed in the way defined in the Sweep Graph 1…4 Config panel FFT Graph 1…2 • Up to two of these display windows can be open simultaneously to display the FFT analyses of the selected measurement function or of the Post-FFT • One-channel or two-channel graphical display • The measurement results are displayed in the way defined in the FFT Graph 1…2 Config panel Waveform • This display window shows the characteristic of the measurement signal over time • One-channel or two-channel graphical display • The measurement results are displayed in the way defined in the Waveform Config panel PESQ Graph 1…2 Bargraph 1…2 Dig Analyzer Protocol 1146.2078.62 • Up to two of these windows can be opened simultaneously to display PESQ measurement values • The measurement results are displayed in the manner defined in the individual PESQ Graph 1…2 Config panel • Up to two of these display windows can be opened to display bargraphs of the selected measurement function • One-channel or two-channel graphical display • The measurement results are displayed in the way defined in the Bargraph 1…2 Config panel • Display window for the data regarding the digital audio protocol of the R&S UPV-K21 option 3.125 E-5 Overview of Status Messages R&S UPV Overview of Status Messages The status of the R&S UPV is continuously displayed for the generator, analyzer, sweep system and other instrument states at the bottom of the screen in four fields above the four right-hand softkeys. Status displays always appear at the same position; they are assigned to the fields above the softkeys as shown below. Analyzer Channel 1 Analyzer Channel 2 Generator Sweep The following overview shows the possible status messages and their meaning: Analyzer status: Status information which applies to the two channels Anlr1 and Anlr2 Off Measurement channel is deactivated Overload Analyzer has been deactivated owing to overload Over Measuring range has been overranged; this can occur if: • Range Fix setting is being used • a signal with a level at range limit is applied with a crest factor > 2 • common-mode voltage is applied in BAL input configuration Under Measuring range has been underranged; this can occur if Range Fix or Lower setting is being used Single Single measurement is being performed Cont Continuous measurement is being performed Terminated Single measurement has been terminated Stopped Measurement has been stopped Wait for Trigger Analyzer is waiting for set trigger condition 1146.2078.62 3.126 E-5 R&S UPV Wait for DC Adj DC Adjusting Overview of Status Messages Analyzer is waiting for internal DC offset adjustment; this is, however, not possible at present because: • cyclic DC offset adjustment has been deactivated or • cyclic DC offset adjustment is disabled owing to a currently active sweep Cyclic internal DC offset adjustment of A/D converter is being performed Generator status: Gen Off Generator is deactivated Gen Running Generator signals are being output Output Off All output lines are deactivated Gen Overload Generator has been deactivated owing to overload Sweep status: Sweep Off No sweep is being performed Sweep Waiting Sweep has been defined but not yet started Sweep Terminated Single sweep has been terminated Sweep Stopped Sweep has been stopped but can be continued Sweep Run Cont Continuous sweep is being performed Sweep Run Single Single sweep is being performed Sweep Run Manual Manual sweep is being performed 1146.2078.62 3.127 E-5 R&S UPV Selecting the Generator Contents - Chapter 4 "Instrument Functions" 4 Instrument Functions .................................................................................................................4.1 Selecting the Generator ...................................................................................................................4.1 Generator Configuration Panel ................................................................................................4.1 Configuring Analog Generator........................................................................................................4.2 Analog Generator Config Panel ...............................................................................................4.2 Generator Outputs ...................................................................................................................4.8 Output Power .........................................................................................................................4.16 Configuring the Digital Generator ................................................................................................4.16 Digital Generator Configuration Panel ...................................................................................4.16 Digital Impairments Configuration Panel................................................................................4.27 2 Configuring the I S Generator.......................................................................................................4.29 2 I S Generator Configuration Panel.........................................................................................4.29 Timing Diagrams ....................................................................................................................4.38 Interface Assignment .............................................................................................................4.40 Configuring the USI Dual Channel Generator .............................................................................4.42 USI Dual Channel Generator Configuration Panel ................................................................4.42 Meaning of the TX_DATA 1 to TX_DATA 4 setting line strings.............................................4.56 Timing Diagrams ....................................................................................................................4.60 Interface assignment..............................................................................................................4.61 Generator Signals...........................................................................................................................4.63 Sine ........................................................................................................................................4.63 Stereo Sine.............................................................................................................................4.66 Multisine .................................................................................................................................4.70 Sine Burst...............................................................................................................................4.73 Sine2 Burst..............................................................................................................................4.76 Mod Dist .................................................................................................................................4.77 DFD ........................................................................................................................................4.80 DIM.........................................................................................................................................4.82 Random..................................................................................................................................4.84 Arbitrary..................................................................................................................................4.91 Play ........................................................................................................................................4.93 Play+Anlr ................................................................................................................................4.98 Polarity .................................................................................................................................4.106 Modulation............................................................................................................................4.106 DC (Direct-Current Voltage).................................................................................................4.108 Square..................................................................................................................................4.108 Amplitude Variation......................................................................................................................4.110 Equalization ..................................................................................................................................4.111 Generator Filters...........................................................................................................................4.112 1146.2084.32 I-4.1 E-9 Selecting the Generator R&S UPV Digital Audio Protocol Generator ...............................................................................................4.113 Advanced Settings ...............................................................................................................4.113 Setting Bytes as Numerical Values ......................................................................................4.114 Setting Bytes in Remote-Control Mode................................................................................4.116 Displaying and Setting Parameters in Plain Text.................................................................4.117 Sweeps ..........................................................................................................................................4.119 Activating / Deactivating the Sweep System........................................................................4.120 One-Dimensional Sweep .....................................................................................................4.122 Two-Dimensional Sweep .....................................................................................................4.124 Automatic Sweep .................................................................................................................4.126 Linear and Logarithmic Sweep ............................................................................................4.129 List Sweep............................................................................................................................4.134 Sweep Speed .......................................................................................................................4.135 Selecting the Analyzer .................................................................................................................4.140 Analyzer Configuration Panel ..............................................................................................4.140 Configuring the Analog Analyzer ...............................................................................................4.142 Analog Analyzer Configuration Panel ..................................................................................4.142 Configuring the Analog Multichannel Analyzer ........................................................................4.154 Multichannel Analyzer Configuration Panel .........................................................................4.154 Configuring the Digital Analyzer.................................................................................................4.166 Digital Analyzer Configuration Panel ...................................................................................4.166 2 Configuring the I S Analyzer .......................................................................................................4.174 2 I S Analyzer Configuration Panel.........................................................................................4.174 Timing Diagrams ..................................................................................................................4.179 Interface Assignment ...........................................................................................................4.180 Configuring the USI Dual Channel Analyzer .............................................................................4.183 USI Dual Channel Analyzer Configuration Panel.................................................................4.183 Timing Diagrams ..................................................................................................................4.198 Interface allocation ...............................................................................................................4.199 Configuring the USI 8 Channel Analyzer ...................................................................................4.201 USI 8 Channel Analyzer Configuration Panel ......................................................................4.201 Timing Diagrams ..................................................................................................................4.215 Interface assignment............................................................................................................4.215 Starting Measurements................................................................................................................4.216 Overview of the Measurement System ................................................................................4.216 Activating and Deactivating Measurement Types................................................................4.216 States of the Measurement System.....................................................................................4.217 Start Conditions............................................................................................................................4.221 Setting Start Condition .........................................................................................................4.222 Time-Controlled Measurement Value Recording.................................................................4.230 External Sweeps and Level-Controlled Measurement Value Triggering .............................4.231 1146.2084.32 I-4.2 E-9 R&S UPV Selecting the Generator Sweep Options..............................................................................................................................4.235 Overview of the Sweep Options...........................................................................................4.235 Activating and Deactivating Sweeps ....................................................................................4.236 States of the Sweep System ................................................................................................4.236 Several Sweep Traces in One Diagram...............................................................................4.240 Level Measurements ....................................................................................................................4.241 Filter Settings .......................................................................................................................4.241 RMS Measurement, Broadband ..........................................................................................4.246 RMS Measurement, Selective..............................................................................................4.249 Rub & Buzz Measurement ...................................................................................................4.263 Peak Measurement ..............................................................................................................4.268 Quasi Peak Measurement....................................................................................................4.270 DC Voltage Measurement....................................................................................................4.271 Signal-to-Noise Measurements...................................................................................................4.272 S/N Measurement Function .................................................................................................4.273 S/N Sequence in Level Measurements................................................................................4.279 Distortion Measurements ............................................................................................................4.280 General Settings ..................................................................................................................4.282 THD ......................................................................................................................................4.285 THD+N / SINAD ...................................................................................................................4.291 MOD DIST............................................................................................................................4.299 DFD ......................................................................................................................................4.301 DIM (dynamic intermodulation distortion analysis) ..............................................................4.304 Polarity Measurement ..................................................................................................................4.307 Frequency Band Analysis ...........................................................................................................4.308 Nth Octave Analysis.............................................................................................................4.308 FFT Analysis .................................................................................................................................4.316 FFT Size...............................................................................................................................4.316 Window Function..................................................................................................................4.318 Post FFT...............................................................................................................................4.320 FFT Measurement Function.................................................................................................4.321 Speech Quality Measurements (PESQ)......................................................................................4.333 PESQ Value and MOS Value ..............................................................................................4.334 Electrical PESQ Measurements...........................................................................................4.335 Acoustic PESQ Measurements............................................................................................4.335 PESQ Graphs ......................................................................................................................4.337 PESQ Measurement Function .............................................................................................4.338 Audio quality measurements (PEAQ).........................................................................................4.345 DI value and ODG value ......................................................................................................4.346 PEAQ measurements ..........................................................................................................4.347 PEAQ graphics.....................................................................................................................4.347 PEAQ measurement function ..............................................................................................4.348 1146.2084.32 I-4.3 E-9 Selecting the Generator R&S UPV Analysis in the Time Domain ......................................................................................................4.353 Waveform Monitor ................................................................................................................4.353 Delay Measurement .............................................................................................................4.364 Offline Analysis ............................................................................................................................4.368 Applications ..........................................................................................................................4.369 Recording Format ................................................................................................................4.369 Monitoring the Recording .....................................................................................................4.370 Recording Modes of the Record Function ...........................................................................4.371 Operating the Record Function ............................................................................................4.371 Creating WAV Files for External Sweeps ............................................................................4.378 Infrasound Measurements...........................................................................................................4.379 Infrasound Signals ...............................................................................................................4.379 Infrasound Analysis..............................................................................................................4.379 Protocol Analysis .........................................................................................................................4.383 Activating and Configuring the Protocol Analysis ................................................................4.383 Channel-Status Information Display ....................................................................................4.386 Error Flag Display ................................................................................................................4.387 Frequency, Phase and Group Delay Measurement ..................................................................4.389 Input Monitor.................................................................................................................................4.397 Level Monitor ................................................................................................................................4.399 Settling Methods...........................................................................................................................4.401 Applications ..........................................................................................................................4.401 Settling Algorithms ...............................................................................................................4.402 Settling for Measurement Functions ....................................................................................4.403 Settling for Frequency Measurements .................................................................................4.406 Settling for Phase Measurements........................................................................................4.409 Settling for Start Conditions (Event-Triggered Measurements) ...........................................4.412 Examples of Settling ....................................................................................................................4.415 Filters .............................................................................................................................................4.416 Analyzer Prefilter ..................................................................................................................4.416 Analyzer Function Filters......................................................................................................4.417 Generator Filters ..................................................................................................................4.417 Filter Table ...........................................................................................................................4.419 User-Definable Filters ..................................................................................................................4.420 Filter 0i..................................................................................................................................4.420 Low-Pass Filter and High-Pass Filter...................................................................................4.421 Band-Pass Filters and Band-Stop Filters.............................................................................4.422 Notch Filter, Third-Octave Filter and Octave Filter ..............................................................4.423 File-Defined Filter .................................................................................................................4.424 Parameters Common to All Filters .......................................................................................4.426 Filter Settling Time ...............................................................................................................4.427 Weighting Filters ..........................................................................................................................4.428 Highpass and Lowpass Filters....................................................................................................4.435 1146.2084.32 I-4.4 E-9 R&S UPV Selecting the Generator Audio Monitoring..........................................................................................................................4.436 Auxiliaries Panel...................................................................................................................4.436 Switcher Panel ..............................................................................................................................4.446 Connecting the Switcher to the R&S UPV ...........................................................................4.446 Default Setting......................................................................................................................4.447 Operation..............................................................................................................................4.447 Traces, Spectrum Displays and Bargraphs...............................................................................4.450 Graphical Display, Explanation of the Elements ..................................................................4.450 Calling Up.............................................................................................................................4.457 Parameter Fields of the Panel..............................................................................................4.458 Softkey Menu .......................................................................................................................4.539 Single Sweep .......................................................................................................................4.544 Trace Group .........................................................................................................................4.544 Interpolation on the Common X Axis ...................................................................................4.547 Result List .....................................................................................................................................4.547 Graphical Display, Explanation of the Elements ..................................................................4.547 Calling Up.............................................................................................................................4.549 Parameter Fields of the Panel..............................................................................................4.549 Softkey Menu .......................................................................................................................4.552 Numeric Display ...........................................................................................................................4.552 Graphical Display, Explanation of the Elements ..................................................................4.553 Calling Up.............................................................................................................................4.555 Parameter Fields of the Panel..............................................................................................4.555 Softkey Menu .......................................................................................................................4.555 Combi Display...............................................................................................................................4.555 Graphical Display, Explanation of the Elements ..................................................................4.556 Calling Up.............................................................................................................................4.558 Parameter Fields of the Panel..............................................................................................4.560 Softkey Menu .......................................................................................................................4.574 Limit Monitoring ...........................................................................................................................4.576 Traces and Bargraphs..........................................................................................................4.576 Measurement Results ..........................................................................................................4.578 Measurement value sequences ..................................................................................................4.580 Saving............................................................................................................................................4.580 Trace files.............................................................................................................................4.580 Equalization files ..................................................................................................................4.581 Sweep list .............................................................................................................................4.581 Limit files ..............................................................................................................................4.582 Loading..........................................................................................................................................4.583 Trace files.............................................................................................................................4.583 Equalization Files .................................................................................................................4.589 Sweep Lists ..........................................................................................................................4.589 Limit Files .............................................................................................................................4.589 1146.2084.32 I-4.5 E-9 Selecting the Generator R&S UPV Format ...........................................................................................................................................4.590 Trace Files............................................................................................................................4.590 Equalization Files .................................................................................................................4.594 Sweep Lists ..........................................................................................................................4.595 Limit Files .............................................................................................................................4.597 Editing ...........................................................................................................................................4.598 Exporting .......................................................................................................................................4.604 Loading and Saving .....................................................................................................................4.607 Integrated File selection box ................................................................................................4.607 File manager ........................................................................................................................4.607 Windows file selection box ...................................................................................................4.608 Loading and Saving Setups ........................................................................................................4.608 Printing and Saving the Display Screen ....................................................................................4.609 Configuring Print and Save Operations ...............................................................................4.609 Starting Print and Save Operations .....................................................................................4.612 1146.2084.32 I-4.6 E-9 R&S UPV Selecting the Generator 4 Instrument Functions Selecting the Generator Generator Configuration Panel The Config panel allows settings for analog and digital generators. To adapt the R&S UPV generator to the measurement task at hand, first define the settings in the Generator Config panel. These settings will determine which capabilities are available in the Generator Function panel. Instrument Used to select the generator. Analog In the Generator Function panel, the user can choose between the universal generator for virtually any signal shape (up to max. 80 kHz) and a lowdistortion sinewave generator (R&S UPV-B1 option "Low-Distortion Generator" up to max. 185 kHz). The sinewave generator can be activated for the generator function "Sine". The digital audio generator continues to run. Remote-control command: INSTrument[1][:SELect] ANLG Digital Audio Select digital audio generator. If no impairments were applied (jitter or a commonmode signal), the analog generator continues to run (see section "Configuring the Digital Generator" on page 4.16). Remote-control command: INSTrument[1][:SELect] DIG I2S Board 2 2 The I S generator can generate audio data in I S format. The analog generator is deactivated. Remote-control command: INSTrument[1][:SELect] I2SBoard 1146.2084.32 4.1 E-9 Configuring Analog Generator Digital Impairment (with R&S UPV-B2 only) R&S UPV The impairments (jitter or a common mode signal) are configured for the digital-audio generator in this panel (see section "Digital Impairments Configuration Panel" on page 4.27), which can then be switched on or off on the digital generator operating panel (see section "Digital Generator Configuration Panel" on page 4.16). The analog generator is switched off as soon as this panel is opened as it is used internally for the production of the impairments. Remote control command: INSTrument[1][:SELect] IMPairment USI Dual Channel Audio data can be produced in serial format with the USI dual channel generator. The analog generator is switched off. Remote control command: INSTrument[1][:SELect] U2Channel Configuring Analog Generator Analog Generator Config Panel Figure 4-1 Analog generator configuration panel 1146.2084.32 4.2 E-9 R&S UPV Configuring Analog Generator The Config panel is used to set up the analog and digital generator. The configuration options for the analog generator are described below. Channel Used to select the signal-carrying XLR plugs in the bottom right-hand part of the R&S UPV front panel. OFF Both XLR plugs are deactivated. Remote-control command: OUTput:CHANnel OFF 1 XLR plug 1 supplies the generator signal; XLR plug 2 is deactivated. Remote-control command: OUTput:CHANnel CH1 2 XLR plug 2 supplies the generator signal; XLR plug 1 is deactivated. Remote-control command: OUTput:CHANnel CH2 281 Both XLR plugs supply an output signal. Note: If the generator function "Stereo Sine" is selected (in the Generator Function panel; the R&S UPV-B3 option is required for this), the level and frequency can be different for each channel of the output signal. Remote-control command: OUTput:CHANnel CH2Is1 1146.2084.32 4.3 E-9 Configuring Analog Generator Output Type R&S UPV The generator output can be configured to be unbalanced (Unbal) or balanced (Bal). The setting always applies to both outputs. The generator can also supply a common-mode signal. Unbal The RMS of the generator signal can be max. 10 V. The output impedance is 5 Ohm. If commercially available BNC cables are to be used, it is recommended to use an XLR/BNC adapter R&S UPL-Z1. Remote-control command: OUTPut:TYPE UNBalanced Bal The RMS of the generator signal can be max. 20 V. The user can choose between three different output impedance values. Remote-control command: OUTPut:TYPE BALanced Com Mode Test Identical output signals are present at pins 2 and 3 of the XLR connectors. The signal lines are referenced to the generator ground. The output impedance is made up of two identical resistances in the two signal lines. This generator output configuration is suitable for measuring the common-mode rejection of balanced DUTs. To correctly address the object to be measured it is necessary to set the generator earth (Common) to “Ground” because otherwise the input signal has no ground reference and is not detected by the object to be measured. If “Common” is set to “Float”, the following warning appears: This function is only available for firmware 1.4.0.206 and higher. If the selection is not available with this firmware, the R&S UPV is equipped with an older Analog Audio Board (AAB) which doesn’t support this function. Remote-control command: OUTPut:TYPE CTESt 1146.2084.32 4.4 E-9 R&S UPV Impedance Configuring Analog Generator This field can only be operated if "Bal" has been selected as the Output Type in the field above. If "Unbal" has been selected, only a field showing a fixed impedance (5 Ohm in this case) is displayed. 10 Ohm The output impedance is 10 Ohm. Remote-control command: OUTPut:IMPedance R10 200 Ohm The output impedance is 200 Ohm. If the R&S UPVU1 option is installed, the output impedance is 150 Ohm. After the R&S UPV-U1 option has been installed, the R&S UPV must be informed of this via the diagnostics panel so that "150 Ohm" is then displayed in the selection box. The installation instructions supplied with the option explain which entries are required for this. Remote-control command: OUTPut:IMPedance R200 600 Ohm The output impedance is 600 Ohm. Remote-control command: OUTPut:IMPedance R600 Common The generator ground can be floating or connected to the instrument ground. XLR Pin 1 always remains unconnected, regardless of the selected configuration. Float The generator ground is not electrically connected to the instrument ground. With the default configuration "Unbal", a capacitance of approx. 25 nF is connected between the two ground connections. With "Bal", the capacitance is approx. 2 nF and is primarily determined by the layout and coupling capacitance inside the toroidal transformer which delivers the supply voltages for the generator. Remote-control command: OUTPut:LOW FLOat 1146.2084.32 4.5 E-9 Configuring Analog Generator Ground R&S UPV The generator ground is electrically connected to the instrument ground with approx. 50 Ohm. Remote-control command: OUTPut:LOW GROund Bandwidth When you choose the universal generator you can set three different fixed frequency ranges and one signal-dependent sampling frequency. 22 kHz The maximum output frequency is 22 kHz. The generator D/A converter is then clocked at 48 kHz. Remote-control command: OUTPut:BANDwidth:MODE B22 40 kHz The maximum output frequency is 40 kHz. The generator D/A converter is then clocked at 96 kHz. Remote-control command: OUTPut:BANDwidth:MODE B40 80 kHz The maximum output frequency is 80 kHz. The generator D/A converter is then clocked at 192 kHz. Remote-control command: OUTPut:BANDwidth:MODE B80 Play Auto For the Play generator function only. The bandwidth is automatically determined as a function of the sample rate entered in the WAV file. This sample rate is likewise used for clocking the generator DAC. Remote-control command: OUTPut:BANDwidth:MODE AUTo alias AUTO Volt Range 1146.2084.32 Two different modes are available for generator level control. 4.6 E-9 R&S UPV Configuring Analog Generator Auto The internal signal paths are optimally driven; the output voltage is adjusted using the analog hardware. Advantage: Optimum noise and distortion values. Remote-control command: SOURce:VOLTage:RANGe AUTO Fix The analog hardware is permanently set to the specified maximum voltage. The actual output voltage is obtained by controlling the level of the D/A converter; the analog hardware settings remain unchanged. Advantage: Faster level changes and better settling. Voltage dips when switching over the attenuator are avoided as no relays are connected. Note: This setting is ignored if the "Low-Distortion Generator" option (R&S UPV-B1) is used. In this case, level control is always performed according to the Auto algorithm. If the Volt Range = Fix setting is chosen for the signal to noise measurement, the generator level does indeed oscillate more rapidly, but in certain cases the lowest possible noise level may not be obtained. This restricts the dynamic response of the signal to noise measurement. Remote-control commands: SOURce:VOLTage:RANGe FIX SOURce:VOLTage:MAXimum Max Voltage Maximum value for the output voltage; prevents excessively high voltage values from being entered inadvertently in the Generator Function panel. The voltage set in the Generator Function panel cannot be higher than the voltage specified here. The RMS for sinewave signals is entered, i.e. the maximum peak value is higher by a factor of 2. Remote-control command: SOURce:VOLTage:MAXimum 1146.2084.32 4.7 E-9 Configuring Analog Generator Ref Voltage R&S UPV Reference value for the relative voltage units. If the reference level is changed, all voltage settings linked to the reference value also change. The relative voltage of the generator signal remains unchanged. By varying the reference voltage, a level sweep defined with relative start and stop levels, for example, can be shifted by a constant "gain factor". Remote-control command: SOURce:VOLTage:REFerence Ref Frequency Reference value for the relative frequency units. If the reference frequency is changed, all frequency settings linked to the reference value also change. The relative frequency of the generator signal remains unchanged. By varying the reference frequency, the fundamental of a distortion spectrum set using a multi-sinewave, for example, can thus be shifted without the harmonics having to be calculated and set again by the user. Remote-control command: SOURce:FREQuency:REFerence Generator Outputs Each output of the analog R&S UPV generator can be configured differently (see the panel description under "Channel", "Output Type", "Impedance" and "Common"). The circuit diagrams for the generator output are shown below. Unbalanced Output (Output Type "Unbal") 5 2 120 pF U XLR connector, male 3 120 pF 25 nF Float / Ground Figure 4-2 Unbalanced Output 1146.2084.32 4.8 E-9 R&S UPV Configuring Analog Generator The following output circuit configurations are available depending on the selected channel setting (capacitors are not shown; the ground symbol denotes the floating generator ground connection): 5 Channel 1 or 2 U Figure 4-3 Channel = 1 or 2 5 Channel 1 Channel 2 U Figure 4-4 Channel = 2 M 1 The selected output impedance is retained even if the output is deactivated; XLR Pin 3 is connected to the generator ground. 1146.2084.32 4.9 E-9 Configuring Analog Generator R&S UPV Balanced Output (Output Type "Bal") The balanced output signal is applied between Pin 2 and Pin 3 of the XLR plug. Pin 1 is not connected. The source impedance consists of two identical resistors in both signal lines. In the diagrams, the ground symbol with the single line represents the floating generator ground connection and the earth symbol represents the R&S UPV housing ground connection. 1/2 Ri 2 120 pF Float / Ground XLR connector, male 2 nF 120 pF 1/2 Ri 3 Figure 4-5 Balanced Output The following output circuit configurations are available depending on the channel and impedance (capacitors are not shown): 1/2 Ri 2 1 /2 U 10 U 1 , 200 , 600 /2 U 1/2 Ri 3 Figure 4-6 Channel = 1 or 2 1146.2084.32 4.10 E-9 R&S UPV Configuring Analog Generator 5 R 2 U R 1 /2 U 3 10 200 600 ( R= 0 ) ( R = 95 ) ( R = 295 ) R 1 /2 U 2 5 U R 3 Figure 4-7 Channel = 2 = 1 The selected output impedance is retained even if the output is deactivated. The deactivated generator output is not connected to generator ground. The diagrams above apply to all generator functions, except "Stereo Sine" and "DIM". The R&S UPVB3 option (Second Generator) is required if a stereo or DIM signal is to be generated. In this case, the XLR plugs Ch1 and Ch2 are supplied slightly differently. 1146.2084.32 4.11 E-9 Configuring Analog Generator R&S UPV If the R&S UPV-B3 option (Second Generator) is installed and the generator function "Stereo Sine" is set, the XLR plugs of the outputs are connected as shown below: 5 R 5 1 Gen1 2 Ch1 3 5 UNBAL 5 R BAL 5 R 5 1 Gen2 2 Ch2 3 5 UNBAL 5 R BAL Option UPV-B3 Figure 4-8 Connection of outputs with "Stereo Sine" As can be seen in the circuit diagram, the two generator outputs are supplied by two independent sources. 1146.2084.32 4.12 E-9 R&S UPV Configuring Analog Generator If the R&S UPV-B3 option (Second Generator) is installed and the generator function "DIM" is set, the XLR plugs of the outputs are connected as shown below: 5 R 5 1 Gen1 2 Ch1 3 5 UNBAL 5 R BAL 5 R 5 1 Gen2 2 Ch2 3 5 UNBAL 5 R BAL Option UPV-B3 Figure 4-9 Connection of outputs with "DIM" The two generator outputs are supplied by the R&S UPV-B3 option (Second Generator). 1146.2084.32 4.13 E-9 Configuring Analog Generator R&S UPV Balanced Output with Common-Mode Signal (Output Type "Com Mode Test") The generator output signal is present with equal phase at pins 2 and 3 of the XLR connectors. The signal lines are referenced to the generator ground. The output impedance is made up of two identical resistances in the two signal lines. The signal source is connected via a 5 N resistance to the node where the signal line branches into two. 1 / 2 Ri 2 120 pF 5 XLR connector U 3 / 2 Ri 1 120 pF Generator ground 2 nF Housing ground Figure 4-10 Balanced Output with common mode signal Depending on the selected channel/channels, the impedance and the waveform, various output configurations are possible as shown below (capacitors not shown). The common source impedance is 5 N for all configurations. The resistances designated ½ Ri represent half the value of the set output impedance. Channel 1 oder 2 /2 Ri 1 2 5 XLR connector U Gen1 (Gen2 at "DIM") 1146.2084.32 3 1 /2 Ri 4.14 E-9 R&S UPV Configuring Analog Generator Channel 2 8 1 / 2 Ri 1 2 Ch1 3 1 /2 Ri 5 / 2 Ri 1 Gen1 (Gen2 at "DIM") U 2 Ch2 3 1 /2 Ri If "Stereo Sine" is set in the Generator Function panel, the two generator outputs are fed by two separate sources: 1 / 2 Ri 2 5 Ch1 Gen1 U 3 / 2 Ri 1 / 2 Ri 1 2 5 Ch2 U Gen2 3 /2 R i 1 1146.2084.32 4.15 E-9 Configuring the Digital Generator R&S UPV Output Power The output amplifier, attenuator and all internal resistors are short-circuit-proof. The peak current value is limited to approx. 200 mA. With a maximum RMS of 20 V (balanced) / 10 V (unbalanced), the maximum power loss in the load resistor (in the case of a short-circuit in the internal resistor) is 2.8 W / 1.4 W. Configuring the Digital Generator Digital Generator Configuration Panel The configuration settings for the digital audio generator are described below. With digital audio interfaces, there are basically two signal types which occur: the analog interface signal and the encoded audio signal itself. The digital interface signal has analog parameters on which, for example, noise or other interference signals can be superimposed – this interference is also noticeable as shifting of the signal edges. When this effect (known as "jitter") exceeds a certain magnitude, it becomes impossible to decode or regenerate the audio signal correctly. The R&S UPV can generate the various digital signal impairments: Shifting of the signal edges (jitter) and superimposition of a common-mode voltage on the digital lines (common mode). The internal analog generator is used for generating such interference signals. Generating impairments require options R&S UPV-B2 and R&S UPV-K22. Add Impairment (with R&S UPV-B2 only) Used to set whether impairments (jitter or a common-mode signal) are to be added to the output signal of the digital audio generators: (see also section "Digital Impairments Configuration Panel" on page 4.27). ON The impairment signal (jitter or common-mode) is activated. The analog generator is deactivated, since it is used for generating the impairment signal. Remote control SOURce:IMPairment ON commans: OFF The impairment signal is deactivated. Remote control SOURce:IMPairment OFF 1146.2084.32 command: 4.16 E-9 R&S UPV Channel Configuring the Digital Generator Used to select the digital audio channels left and right. OFF Both channels are deactivated. The frequency and level setting of the channels have no effect. An "empty frame" which does not contain any audio data is generated. Remote-control command: OUTput:CHANnel OFF 1 Only the left-hand channel supplies the generator signal; the right-hand channel is deactivated. Remote-control command: OUTput:CHANnel CH1 2 Only the right-hand channel supplies the generator signal; the left-hand channel is deactivated. Remote-control command: OUTput:CHANnel CH2 2=1 Both the left and right-hand channel supply the same output signal. If the generator function "Stereo Sine" is selected, both channels may differ with regard to frequency, phase and amplitude. Remote-control command: OUTput:CHANnel CH2Is1 Sync To (with R&S UPV-B2 only) Used to select the source to which the digital audio generator is synchronized. Internal CLK The generator is synchronized to the internal clock generator. The clock frequency is determined by the sample frequency setting. Remote-control command: SOURce:SYNC:TO INTClock 1146.2084.32 4.17 E-9 Configuring the Digital Generator Audio In R&S UPV Synchronization to the digital audio input signal. Remote-control command: SOURce:SYNC:TO AINPut Aux In Synchronization to the digital audio signal at the AUX input XLR socket at the rear of the instrument. Remote-control command: SOURce:SYNC:TO AUXinput Sync In Synchronization to the word-clock signal at the SYNC input BNC socket at the rear of the instrument. The generator sync PLL is used. Remote-control command: SOURce:SYNC:TO SINPut Sync In inv Synchronization to the inverted word-clock signal at the SYNC input BNC socket at the rear of the instrument. Remote-control command: SOURce:SYNC:TO SINVinput Sync Output (with R&S UPV-B2 only) Used to select the source for the digital audio sync output at the rear of the instrument. "Sync Out Type" can be set to either Word Clock or Biphase Clock (the frequency of the biphase clock is 128 times that of the word clock). Audio Out Clock signal of the digital audio generator. Always the same as the clock rate of the digital audio output on the front panel. If "Jitter" is set, jitter is applied to this output. Remote-control command: OUTPut:SYNC:OUTPut ADOutput Audio In Clock signal of the selected digital audio input on the front panel. Remote-control command: OUTPut:SYNC:OUTPut ADINput 1146.2084.32 4.18 E-9 R&S UPV Configuring the Digital Generator Aux In Clock signal of the digital audio auxiliary input at the rear of the instrument. Remote-control command: OUTPut:SYNC:OUTPut AXINput Gen Sync PLL Clock signal at the output of the generator sync PLL. Allows the frequency of a word clock applied at the sync input to be increased by a factor of 128. If "Jitter" is set, the set jitter is not applied to this output. See setting of the generator sampling rate. Remote-control command: OUTPut:SYNC:OUTPut GSYPll Jitt Ref PLL Clock signal at the output of the jitter reference PLL. Allows a low-jitter clock to be recovered from the digital audio input signal. See setting of the digital audio analyzer sampling rate. Remote-control command: OUTPut:SYNC:OUTPut JRFPll Aux Out Clock signal of the digital audio auxiliary generator. This generator is used e.g. for the frame phase setting and the reclock function. Remote-control command: OUTPut:SYNC:OUTPut AXOutput Sync In Loop-through option of the digital audio sync input, e.g. for cascading several instruments which synchronize to the word clock. Remote-control command: OUTPut:SYNC:OUTPut SYINput Internal Clk Output signal of the internal clock source. If the digital audio generator is not synchronized to the internal clock, the internal clock is available as an independent clock source and is set using the selection parameter "Int Clk Freq". Remote-control command: OUTPut:SYNC:OUTPut INTClock 1146.2084.32 4.19 E-9 Configuring the Digital Generator Int Clk Freq (with R&S UPV-B2 only) R&S UPV Used to set the (word-clock) frequency of the internal clock generator if the internal clock generator is used as an independent clock source at the digital audio sync output. Remote-control command: OUTPut:INTClockfreq Sync Out Type (with R&S UPV-B2 only) "Sync Out Type" can be set to either Word Clock or Biphase Clock (the frequency of the biphase clock is 128 times that of the word clock). Word CLK The signal of the digital audio sync output corresponds to the sampling frequency of the selected source. Remote-control command: OUTPut:SYNC:TYPE WCLock Biphase CLK The signal of the digital audio sync output corresponds to the biphase clock, i.e. 128 times the sampling frequency of the selected source. The biphase clock is often used for direct clocking of the digital audio modules. Remote-control command: OUTPut:SYNC:TYPE BCLock Aux Output (with R&S UPV-B2 only) 1146.2084.32 Used to select the source for the digital audio auxiliary output at the rear of the instrument. 4.20 E-9 R&S UPV Configuring the Digital Generator Audio Out The digital audio generator signal at the auxiliary output is identical to the signal at the front output. The signal output level is constant and does not depend on the selected BAL / UNBAL output level. The long cable simulator and common-mode superimposition have no effect on this output. If a jitter is set, it will also affect this output. Remote-control command: OUTPut:AUXiliary AOUTput Audio In Loop-through option of the digital audio signal from the selected input to the digital audio auxiliary output. The signal output level is constant and does not depend on the selected input or the pulse amplitude at the digital input. Remote-control command: OUTPut:AUXiliary AINPut Audio In Reclocked The jitter-reduced input signal is output. The audio data content is extracted from the input signal and output again via the digital audio auxiliary generator. This generator is controlled using the lowjitter clock from the jitter reference PLL. Remote-control command: OUTPut:AUXiliary AINReclock Audio Ref Gen Here, the digital audio auxiliary generator is used as the reference generator for the frame phase setting of the digital audio generator. If this setting is selected, it is then possible to set a frame phase and select the reference generator data. This setting cannot be selected if the digital generator is synchronized to the sync input. Remote-control command: OUTPut:AUXiliary RGENerator Aux In Loop-through option of the digital audio auxiliary input, e.g. for cascading several instruments. Remote-control command: OUTPut:AUXiliary AUXin 1146.2084.32 4.21 E-9 Configuring the Digital Generator Ref Gen Data (with R&S UPV-B2 only) R&S UPV If "Audio Ref Gen" is selected as the "Aux Output" source, it is then possible to configure the audio data for this reference generator. All Zero All audio data bits are set to zero. An "empty frame" is output (this is normally the case). Remote-control command: SOURce:REFerence AZERo All One To allow digital audio receivers to be tested, the audio data bits can all be set to one. Remote-control command: SOURce:REFerence AONE Phase To Ref (with R&S UPV-B2 only) If "Audio Ref Gen" is selected as the "Aux Output" source, it is then possible to vary the frame phase offset of the digital audio signal between the front output and the digital audio AUX output at the rear of the instrument. The phase is shifted internally using the generator sync PLL. Off "Phase To Ref" variation is deactivated. Here, the generator sync PLL is bypassed, which generally results in an improvement of the clock for the digital audio generator. Remote-control command: SOURce:PTORef OFF Value A frame phase shift is activated and an appropriate setting value can be entered. Remote-control command: SOURce:PTORef VALue 1146.2084.32 4.22 E-9 R&S UPV Frame Phase (with R&S UPV-B2 only) Configuring the Digital Generator Used to enter the value for the desired frame phase shift. The value can be entered in various units. The maximum variation range for the shift always corresponds to a phase shift of +/- 180° relative to the frame phase of the reference generator. The generator sync PLL is used for generating the phase shift. Remote-control command: SOURce:FRAMephase Sample Frequency Used to set the clock rate of the digital audio signal for the generator. The sample frequency setting is used as a reference whenever audio data signals are generated. With "Common Only" and "Jitter Only" generation (with R&S UPV-B2 only), this setting therefore determines the clock rate of the generated empty frame. The selected clock rate determines the maximum signal frequency which can be input. For sinus signals this is 49.9% of the sampling rate. R&S UPV-B2: R&S UPV-B20: If the entered sample frequency is not the same as the actual clock rate (e.g. with external synchronization), the frequency of all audio data signals is shifted accordingly. This setting is also used to select the correct range for the generator sync PLL. Value range for numeric entries: 30 kHz to 200 kHz (30 to 55 kHz with R&S UPV-B20) Standard sampling frequencies can be set directly in the selection field. 1146.2084.32 4.23 E-9 Configuring the Digital Generator R&S UPV Only R&S UPV-B2: Synchronization ranges for the generator sync PLL: 30 kHz to 64 kHz (base rate range) 65 kHz to 128 kHz (high rate range) 129 kHz to 200 kHz (extended rate range) If "Audio In" is selected as the synchronization in the "Sync To" line, the generator can be set to the same sample frequency as the digital analyzer by selecting "Sync to Anlr" from the "Sample Freq" line. 32 kHz Standard sampling rate 32 kHz Remote-control command: OUTPut:SAMPle:MODE F32 44.1 kHz Standard sampling rate 44.1 kHz Remote-control command: OUTPut:SAMPle:MODE F44 48 kHz Standard sampling rate 48 kHz Remote-control command: OUTPut:SAMPle:MODE F48 88.2 kHz Standard sampling rate 88.2 kHz Remote-control command: OUTPut:SAMPle:MODE F88 96 kHz Standard sampling rate 96 kHz Remote-control command: OUTPut:SAMPle:MODE F96 176.4 kHz Standard sampling rate 176.4 kHz Remote-control command: OUTPut:SAMPle:MODE F176 192 kHz Standard sampling rate 192 kHz Remote-control command: OUTPut:SAMPle:MODE F192 Sync To Anlr 1146.2084.32 The sampling rate of the digital audio analyzer is used for synchronization. Remote-control command: OUTPut:SAMPle:MODE SYNChron 4.24 E-9 R&S UPV Configuring the Digital Generator Value: Variable sampling rate entry Remote-control command: OUTPut:SAMPle:MODE VALue OUTPut:SAMPle:FREQuency Audio Bits Wordwidth used by the digital audio generator for the Source Mode "Audio Data". If the wordwidth is reduced, the values of the audio samples are rounded off to the specified wordwidth. Unused data bits are encoded as zeroes in the digital audio signal. Value range: 8 to 24 Remote-control command: OUTPut:AUDiobits Bal Ampl Used to set the pulse amplitude of the digital audio signal at the BAL (XLR) output. The set voltage corresponds to the peak-to-peak value of the pulse amplitude when the output is terminated with the nominal impedance (110 Ohm) The standard voltage is 4 V Setting range: 0 V to 8.5 V This voltage is linked to the setting for the UNBAL amplitude and is always 4 times higher than this amplitude. Remote-control command: OUTPut:SIGNal:BALanced:LEVel Unbal Ampl Used to set the pulse amplitude of the digital audio signal at the UNBAL (BNC) output. The set voltage corresponds to the peak-topeak value of the pulse amplitude when the output is terminated with the nominal impedance (75 Ohm) The standard voltage is 1 V Setting range: 0 V to 2.125 V This voltage is linked to the setting for the BAL amplitude and is always a quarter of this amplitude. Remote-control command: OUTPut:SIGNal:LEVel 1146.2084.32 4.25 E-9 Configuring the Digital Generator Unbal Output R&S UPV The unbalanced output can be switched so that the digital audio signal of the selected BAL or UNBAL input is output. If the BAL input is selected, the balanced signal is converted into an unbalanced signal. The signal at the BAL input can then be monitored conveniently e.g. on a connected oscilloscope. Audio Out The digital audio generator signal is output. Remote-control command: OUTPut:UNBalanced:OUTPut AOUTput Audio In The digital audio signal from the selected BAL or UNBAL input is output. It is not possible to output the signal of the optical input in this case. The pulse amplitude setting and the cable simulator do not have any effect on this output. Remote-control command: OUTPut:UNBalanced:OUTPut AINPut Cable Sim Cable simulation used to check the effect of attenuated input signals along long cables when tests are performed on digital audio receivers. A cable length of approx. 100 m is simulated. Off Cable simulation is deactivated. Remote-control command: OUTPut:CSIMulator OFF Long Cable simulation for the BAL and UNBAL outputs is activated. Remote-control command: OUTPut:CSIMulator SIMLong Ref Voltage Reference value for the relative amplitude units. If the reference value is changed, all amplitude settings linked to the reference value also change. Remote-control command: SOURce:VOLTage:REFerence 1146.2084.32 4.26 E-9 R&S UPV Configuring the Digital Generator Ref Frequency Reference value for the relative frequency units. If the reference frequency is changed, all frequency settings linked to the reference value also change. Remote-control command: SOURce:FREQuency:REFerence Digital Impairments Configuration Panel The digital impairment configuration panel requires option R&S UPV-B2. This panel is used to select the digital impairment signal - jitter or common-mode - which can be added to the output signal of the digital audio generator. The parameters of the signals are set in the generator function panel. The impairments are activated or deactivated in the Digital Audio Generator Config panel. Source Mode Used to set whether jitter or a common-mode signal is generated. Jitter A digital audio signal with jitter for tests on digital audio receivers can be generated. The value of the jitter and delay impairment is normally specified in UI (Unit Interval). One UI is defined as the smallest pulse width of the digital audio signal (eye width) and does not depend on the selected sampling rate. One UI corresponds to the clock period with which the digital signal is clocked ("biphase clock"). With digital audio signals, one UI corresponds to the 128th part of the sampling period; at 48 kHz, one UI is 163 approx. ns. Remote control command: SOURce:SRCMode JITTer Common A digital audio signal with superimposition of a common-mode signal at the BAL output can be generated. Balanced cables are also used for the digital audio signal links. Here, coupled impairments (e.g. from ground loops) occur as commonmode voltage at the interfaces. Remote control command: SOURce:SRCMode COMMon 1146.2084.32 4.27 E-9 Configuring the Digital Generator Ref Voltage R&S UPV Reference value for the relative amplitude units. The unit for the reference value corresponds to the selected source mode (e.g. UI in the source mode "Jitter"). If the reference value is changed, all amplitude settings linked to the reference value also change. Remote-control command: SOURce:VOLTage:REFerence Ref Frequency Reference value for the relative frequency units. If the reference frequency is changed, all frequency settings linked to the reference value also change. Remote-control command: SOURce:FREQuency:REFerence 1146.2084.32 4.28 E-9 R&S UPV Configuring the I2S Generator Configuring the I2S Generator I2S Generator Configuration Panel 2 The Config panel is used to set the analog and digital generator. The configuration options for the I S generator are described below. Channel Used to select the digital audio channels left (Ch1) and right (Ch2). OFF Both channels are deactivated. The frequency and level setting of the channels have no effect. An "empty frame" that does not contain any audio data (all bits = zero) is generated. Remote-control command: OUTPut:CHANnel OFF 1 Only the left channel supplies the generator signal; the right channel is deactivated (all bits = zero). Remote-control command: OUTPut:CHANnel CH1 2 Only the right channel supplies the generator signal; the left channel is deactivated (all bits = zero). Remote-control command: OUTPut:CHANnel CH2 281 Both the left and right channels supply the same output signal. If the generator function "Stereo Sine" is selected, the two may differ with regard to frequency, phase and amplitude. Remote-control command: OUTPut:CHANnel CH2Is1 1146.2084.32 4.29 E-9 Configuring the I2S Generator Sync To R&S UPV 2 Used to select the source to which the I S generator is synchronized. Intern The generator uses the internal clock. Remote-control command: SOURce:DIGital:SYNC:TO INTern Extern Masterclk Synchronization to the applied master clock signal at the rear TX CLK IN connector. Remote-control command: SOURce:DIGital:SYNC:TO EXTMasterclock Extern Wordclk Synchronization to the applied word clock signal at the rear TX CLK IN connector. Remote-control command: SOURce:DIGital:SYNC:TO EXTWordclock Word Length Word length of a data frame for each channel. Value range: 16, 24, 32. 16 bit Word length 16 bits Remote-control command: OUTPut:WLENgth W16 24 bit Word length 24 bits Remote-control command: OUTPut:WLENgth W24 32 bit Word length 32 bits Remote-control command: OUTPut:WLENgth W32 1146.2084.32 4.30 E-9 R&S UPV Sample Frequency Configuring the I2S Generator Used to set the sampling frequency. The sampling frequency corresponds to the frequency of the FSYNC signal. All frequency information of generated audio data are with 2 reference to this setting. If the I S generator is operated with external wordclock synchronization and the frequency of the external clock 2 signal does not correspond to the set sampling frequency, the I S generator generates audio data with an incorrect frequency. Even with external masterclock synchronization, the external clock signal must correspond to the set sampling frequency multiplied by the selected 2 MClk ratio. Otherwise, the I S generator also generates audio data with an incorrect frequency. The selected clock rate determines the maximum signal frequency which can be input. For sinus signals this is 49.9% of the sampling rate. Value range for numeric entry: 6.75 kHz to 410 kHz Standard sampling frequencies can be set directly in the selection field. 8 kHz Standard sampling rate 8 kHz Remote-control command: OUTPut:SAMPle:MODE F08 11.025 kHz Standard sampling rate 11.025 kHz Remote-control command: OUTPut:SAMPle:MODE F11 16 kHz Standard sampling rate 16 kHz Remote-control command: OUTPut:SAMPle:MODE F16 22.05 kHz Standard sampling rate 22.05 kHz Remote-control command: OUTPut:SAMPle:MODE F22 1146.2084.32 4.31 E-9 Configuring the I2S Generator 32 kHz R&S UPV Standard sampling rate 32 kHz Remote-control command: OUTPut:SAMPle:MODE F32 44.1 kHz Standard sampling rate 44.1 kHz Remote-control command: OUTPut:SAMPle:MODE F44 48 kHz Standard sampling rate 48 kHz Remote-control command: OUTPut:SAMPle:MODE F48 88.2 kHz Standard sampling rate 88.2 kHz Remote-control command: OUTPut:SAMPle:MODE F88 96 kHz Standard sampling rate 96 kHz Remote-control command: OUTPut:SAMPle:MODE F96 176.4 kHz Standard sampling rate 176.4 kHz Remote-control command: OUTPut:SAMPle:MODE F176 192 kHz Standard sampling rate 192 kHz Remote-control command: OUTPut:SAMPle:MODE F192 384 kHz Standard sampling rate 384 kHz Remote-control command: OUTPut:SAMPle:MODE F384 Value: Variable sampling rate entry Remote-control commands: OUTPut:SAMPle:MODE VALue OUTPut:SAMPle:FREQuency BClk Freq Bitclock frequency display. This is calculated from the product of Word Length / Sample Freq. Value range: 216 kHz ... 26.24 MHz Remote control command: OUTPut:BCLk:FREQuency? 1146.2084.32 4.32 E-9 R&S UPV MClk Ratio Configuring the I2S Generator Ratio between MCLK and FSYNC. Value range: 64, 96, 128, 192, 256, 512 The value range is limited by word length and sampling frequency. Word Length 16 bit, Sync To Intern: Sampling frequency Selectable MClk ratio 6.75 kHz to 108 kHz >108 kHz to 216 kHz >216 kHz to 410 kHz 64, 128, 256, 512 64, 128, 256 64, 128 Word Length 24 bit, Sync To Intern: Sampling frequency Selectable MClk ratio 6.75 kHz to 108 kHz >108 kHz to 216 kHz 96, 192, 384 96, 192 Word Length 32 bit, Sync To Intern: Sampling frequency Selectable MClk ratio 6.75 kHz to 108 kHz >108 kHz to 216 kHz >216 kHz to 410 kHz 128, 256, 512 128, 256 128 Word Length 16 bit, Sync To Extern Masterclk: Sampling frequency Selectable MClk ratio 6.75 kHz to 108 kHz >108 kHz to 216 kHz >216 kHz to 410 kHz 128, 256, 512 128, 256 128 Word Length 24 bit, Sync To Extern Masterclk: 1146.2084.32 Sampling frequency Selectable MClk ratio 6.75 kHz to 108 kHz >108 kHz to 216 kHz 192, 384 192 4.33 E-9 Configuring the I2S Generator R&S UPV Word Length 32 bit, Sync To Extern Masterclk: Sampling frequency Selectable MClk ratio 6.75 kHz to 108 kHz >108 kHz to 216 kHz >216 kHz to 410 kHz 128, 256, 512 128, 256 128 Word Length 16 bit, Sync To Extern Wordclk: Sampling frequency Selectable MClk ratio 6.75 kHz to 108 kHz >108 kHz to 216 kHz >216 kHz to 410 kHz 64, 128, 256, 512 64, 128, 256 64, 128 Word Length 24 bit, Sync To Extern Wordclk: Sampling frequency Selectable MClk ratio 6.75 kHz to 108 kHz >108 kHz to 216 kHz 96, 192, 384 96, 192 Word Length 32 bit, Sync To Extern Wordclk: Sampling frequency Selectable MClk ratio 6.75 kHz to 108 kHz >108 kHz to 216 kHz >216 kHz to 410 kHz 128, 256, 512 128, 256 128 64 64 times the sampling rate (with word length 16 bits) Remote-control command: OUTPut:MCLKratio M64 96 96 times the sampling rate (with word length 24 bits) Remote-control command: OUTPut:MCLKratio M96 128 128 times the sampling rate (with word length 16 and 32 bits) Remote-control command: OUTPut:MCLKratio M128 192 192 times the sampling rate (with word length 24 bit) Remote-control command: OUTPut:MCLKratio M192 1146.2084.32 4.34 E-9 R&S UPV Configuring the I2S Generator 256 256 times the sampling rate (with word length 16 and 32 bit) Remote-control command: OUTPut:MCLKratio M256 384 384 times the sampling rate (with word length 24 bits) Remote-control command: OUTPut:MCLKratio M384 512 512 times the sampling rate (with word length 16 and 32 bits) Remote-control command: OUTPut:MCLKratio M512 Audio Bits Resolution of audio data within a frame. If the resolution is reduced, the values of the audio samples are rounded off to the specified word length. Unused data bits are encoded as zeroes in the digital audio signal. Value range: 8 ... "Word Length" Remote-control command: OUTPut:AUDiobits Format 2 Selection of the I S generator function. Standard I2S 2 2 The I S generator transmits in the standard I S format. The following parameters are assigned a fixed default: Fsync Shape Fsync Polarity Word Offset Square Pulse Left(1) = Low -1 Remote-control command: OUTPut:FORMat SI2S 1146.2084.32 4.35 E-9 Configuring the I2S Generator Userdefinable R&S UPV 2 2 Der I S generator transmits in I S-like format. The following format-influencing parameters are additionally available: Fsync Shape Fsync Polarity Word Offset Remote-control command: OUTPut:FORMat USER Fsync Shape Selection of the FSYNC signal form. Square Pulse The FSYNC signal is transmitted as a symmetrical rectangle. Remote-control command: OUTPut: FSHape SQU Bit Pulse The FSYNC signal is transmitted as a bit pulse. Remote-control command: OUTPut: FSHape BITP Fsync Polarity FSYNC signal polarity. If Fsync Shape is set to Square Pulse, the following selection is available: Left (1) = Low While the left channel (channel 1) is being sent, a low level is applied at the FSYNC signal at a word offset of 0. Remote-control command: OUTPut:FPUlse LFTL Left (1) = High While the left channel (channel 1) is being sent, a high level is applied at the FSYNC signal at a word offset of 0. Remote-control command: OUTPut:FPUlse LFTH 1146.2084.32 4.36 E-9 R&S UPV Configuring the I2S Generator If Fsync Shape is set to to Bit Pulse, the following selection is available: Positive At a Word Offset of 0, a positive pulse marks the beginning of the left data word. Remote-control command: OUTPut:FPUlse POS Negative At a Word Offset of 0, a negative pulse marks the beginning of the left data word. Remote-control command: OUTPut:FPUlse NEG Word Offset By using Word Offset, you can set the number of SCK clock cycles by which the Fsync signal transmission is delayed relative to the audio data. Value range: -"Word Length"… 0 ... +"Word Length"-1 Remote-control command: OUTPut:WOFFset Ref Voltage Reference value for the relative amplitude units. If this reference value is changed, all amplitude settings linked to the reference value also change. Remote-control command: SOURce:VOLTage:REFerence Ref Frequency Reference value for the relative frequency units. If this reference frequency is changed, all frequency settings linked to the reference value also change. Remote-control command: SOURce:FREQuency:REFerence 1146.2084.32 4.37 E-9 Configuring the I2S Generator R&S UPV Timing Diagrams The timing diagrams below show a number of configuration examples that illustrate the effect of the parameters. Standard I2S Word Offset (Word Offset = -1) (Fsync Shape = Square Pulse) (Fsync Polarity = Left (1) = Low) SCK FSYNC DATA MSB Word n-1 Sample r-1 Right Channel LSB Word n Sample l Left Channel MSB Word n+1 Sample r Right Channel Audio Bits Word Length User-Definable Word Offset Word Offset = 1 Fsync Shape = Bit Pulse Fsync Polarity = positive SCK FSYNC DATA Word n-1 Sample r-1 Right Channel MSB LSB Word n Sample l Left Channel MSB Word n+1 Sample r Right Channel Audio Bits Word Length 1146.2084.32 4.38 E-9 R&S UPV Configuring the I2S Generator User-Definable Word Offset Word Offset = -1 Fsync Shape = Bit Pulse Fsync Polarity = negative SCK FSYNC DATA Word n-1 Sample r-1 Right Channel MSB LSB Word n Sample l Left Channel MSB Word n+1 Sample r Right Channel Audio Bits Word Length 1146.2084.32 4.39 E-9 Configuring the I2S Generator R&S UPV Interface Assignment 2 I S connector (25-contact D-Sub connector) It is recommended to use a shielded cable when connecting the R&S UPV via the RS 232-C-interface. GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND 1 13 14 25 TX_MCLK +3.3V RX_SCK +5V RX_FSYNC TX_DATA RX_DATA TX_SCK TX_FSYNC Pin Signal Input (I) Output (O) Data direction 1 GND Ground connection 2 GND Ground connection 3 GND Ground connection 4 GND Ground connection 5 GND Ground connection 6 GND Ground connection 7 GND Ground connection 8 GND Ground connection 9 GND Ground connection 10 GND Ground connection 11 GND Ground connection 12 GND Ground connection 13 GND Ground connection 14 not connected 15 RX_SCK I Serial clock analyzer 16 RX_FSYNC I Frame sync analyzer 17 RX_DATA I Serial data analyzer 18 not connected 19 +3.3 V (500 mA) O Power supply 20 +5 V (500 mA) O Power supply 21 not connected 22 TX_DATA O Serial data generator 23 TX_FSYNC O Frame sync generator 24 TX_SCK O Serial clock generator 25 TX_MCLK O Master clock output generator 1146.2084.32 4.40 E-9 R&S UPV Configuring the I2S Generator TX CLK IN (BNC connector) Pin Signal 1 GND 2 TX_CLK 1146.2084.32 Input (I) Output (O) Data direction Ground connection I Master clock input generator 4.41 E-9 Configuring the USI Dual Channel Generator R&S UPV Configuring the USI Dual Channel Generator USI Dual Channel Generator Configuration Panel The configuration panel is used for the analog and digital generator settings. The configuration options for the USI dual channel generator are described below. Clock Used to select the continuous clock or gated clock operating modes. Continuous The continuous clock operating mode requires a continuous clock for the generator. The clock source may be internal or external. Several types of synchronisation are available if the timing device is external. Remote control command: OUTPut:CLOCk CONTinous Gated The gated clock operating mode must be selected if the externally supplied bit clock (BClk) and the externally supplied word clock (Fsync) are discontinuous or have such a large jitter that the internal PLL can no longer follow this clock. The synchronisation type is limited to the “external word clock and bit clock” (Ext Fsync&BClk) mode. Audio monitoring of the audio signal generated is not possible. Remote control command: OUTPut:CLOCk GATed Mixed Sampfrq Used to produce data streams of varying sampling rates in both generator channels. When activated, the generator filter is not available. Remote control command: OUTPut:MSAMplefrequency ON|OFF 1146.2084.32 4.42 E-9 R&S UPV Ratio Configuring the USI Dual Channel Generator Down-sampling factor for 2nd generator channel with regard to the sampling rate. Value range: 2 … 6 Remote control command: OUTPut:RATio Samples/Frame Defines the number of samples of a generator channel per frame. The parameter simultaneously determines the minimum settable sampling rate according to the relationship: fs_min = 843.75 Hz * samples/frame. Value range: 1 ... 32 Remote control command: OUTPut:SPFRame No of Slots Defines the number slots per frame. Value range: 1 ... 256 No_of_Slots * Slot_Length <= 2048 Slot_Length * No_of_Slots * Sample_Freq <= 55.926 MHz Remote control command: OUTPut:NOSLots TX_DATA1 Defines which signal is output on the individual slots of the TX_DATA1 data line. Remote control command: OUTPut:TXData TX_DATA2 Defines which signal is output on the individual slots of the TX_DATA2 data line. Remote control command: OUTPut:TXData2 1146.2084.32 4.43 E-9 Configuring the USI Dual Channel Generator TX_DATA3 R&S UPV Defines which signal is output on the individual slots of the TX_DATA3 data line. Remote control command: OUTPut:TXData3 TX_DATA4 Defines which signal is output on the individual slots of the TX_DATA4 data line. Remote control command: OUTPut:TXData4 Sync To Used to select the source to which the USI generator is synchronised. Internal Clock The generator uses the device’s internal clock. Remote control command: SOURce:SYNC:TO IClock Ext Masterclk Synchronises to the externally supplied master clock signal (TX_MCLK_IN). Remote control command: SOURce:SYNC:TO EMASterclock Ext Fsync Ext Fsync (AudMon) Synchronises to the external FrameSync signal (TX_FSYNC_IN). The generator signal cannot be audio-monitored. A master clock signal is additionally generated and output. Remote control command: SOURce:SYNC:TO EFSYnc Synchronises to the external FrameSync (TX_FSYNC_IN) signal. The generator signal can be audio-monitored. No master clock signal is ouptut. Remote control command: SOURce:SYNC:TO EFAMon 1146.2084.32 4.44 E-9 R&S UPV Configuring the USI Dual Channel Generator Ext Fsync&BClk Synchronises to the external FrameSync (TX_FSYNC_IN) and bit clock (TX_BCLK_IN) signals. Remote control command: SOURce:SYNC:TO EFBClk Overview of the various synchronisation modes: Internal clock External master clock External frame sync External frame sync with audio monitor External frame sync, bit clock External frame sync, bit clock (gated) Master clock output o tri o tri o tri Master clock input -- x -- -- -- -- Bit clock output o o o o tri tri Bit clock input -- -- -- -- x x Frame sync output o o o o tri tri Frame sync input -- -- x x x x Slot clock output o o o o o o x o tri -- Input signal must be present Output signal is available Output in tristate mode (high impedance) input not used First Bit Defines the sequence in which the data bits are transmitted MSB The most significant bit is transmitted first. Remote control command: OUTPut:FBIT MSB LSB The least significant bit is transmitted first. Remote control command: OUTPut:FBIT LSB Slot Length Slot length of a slot including gaps ( 0 bits) Value range: 8 to 256 No_of_Slots * Slot_Length <= 2048 Slot_Length * No_of_Slots * Sample_Freq <= 55.926 MHz Remote control command: OUTPut:SLTLength 1146.2084.32 4.45 E-9 Configuring the USI Dual Channel Generator Audio Bits R&S UPV Slot length of the audio data within a slot (sub-frame). Unused data bits are coded as zeros in the digital audio signal. Value range: 8 to slot length (max 32) Remote control command: OUTPut:AUDiobits Lead Bits Defines the offset of the audio bits within a slot relative to the start of the slot. If LSB is selected as first bit the lead bits setting is automatically corrected if the audio bits setting is changed so that the MSB is transmitted in the same position. This has the advantage that the resolution of the signal transmitted is changed but not the amplitude if the audio bits are changed. Example: Channel Length: 32 Audio bits: 24 23 (setting changed by user) Lead bits: 8 9 (automatic correction) Value range: 0 to slot length - audio bits Remote control command: OUTPut:LBITs 1146.2084.32 4.46 E-9 R&S UPV Sample Freq Configuring the USI Dual Channel Generator Used to set the sample frequency. All frequency specifications of the audio data transmitted refer to this setting. If the USI generator is operated with external synchronisation and the frequency of the external clock signal does not correspond to the set frequency of the Fsync signal, the generator generates signals with the wrong frequency. The selected clock rate determines the maximum signal frequency which can be input. For sinus signals this is 49.9% of the sampling rate. For data formats with one sample per frame, the sample frequency corresponds to the FSync signal frequency. In the case of several audio data samples from one source within a frame, the frequency of the FSync signal results from the sample frequency divided by the samples/frame factor. Value range for numeric input: 0.84375 kHz to 400 kHz No_of_Slots * Slot_Length <= 2048 Slot_Length * No_of_Slots * Sample_Freq <= 55.926 MHz Standard sampling frequencies can be set directly in the selection list. Auto Automatic setting of the sampling rate. The sampling rate is measured, set and displayed in the following line. The set value is automatically updated if the existing sampling rates changes. This setting is only available with external synchronisation. Note: The digital generator must be re-initialized with every new sampling frequency. If an external clock with a large jitter is fed in a fixed frequency should be selected instead of the Auto setting. Remote control command: OUTPut:SAMPle:MODE AUTO 1146.2084.32 4.47 E-9 Configuring the USI Dual Channel Generator 8 kHz R&S UPV 8 kHz standard sampling frequency Remote control command: OUTPut:SAMPle:MODE F08 11,025 kHz 11.025 kHz standard sampling frequency Remote control command: OUTPut:SAMPle:MODE F11 16 kHz 16 kHz standard sampling frequency Remote control command: OUTPut:SAMPle:MODE F16 22,05 kHz 22.05 kHz standard sampling frequency Remote control command: OUTPut:SAMPle:MODE F22 32 kHz 32 kHz standard sampling frequency Remote control command: OUTPut:SAMPle:MODE F32 44,1 kHz 44.1 kHz standard sampling frequency Remote control command: OUTPut:SAMPle:MODE F44 48 kHz 48 kHz standard sampling frequency Remote control command: OUTPut:SAMPle:MODE F48 88,2 kHz 88.2 kHz standard sampling frequency Remote control command: OUTPut:SAMPle:MODE F88 96 kHz 96 kHz standard sampling frequency Remote control command: OUTPut:SAMPle:MODE F96 176,4 kHz 176.4 kHz standard sampling frequency Remote control command: OUTPut:SAMPle:MODE F176 192 kHz 192 kHz standard sampling frequency Remote control command: OUTPut:SAMPle:MODE F192 384 kHz 384 kHz standard sampling frequency Remote control command: OUTPut:SAMPle:MODE F384 1146.2084.32 4.48 E-9 R&S UPV Configuring the USI Dual Channel Generator Value Numeric input of the sampling frequency Remote control command: OUTPut:SAMPle:MODE VALue OUTPut:SAMPle:FREQuency Fsync Freq Is only displayed for multi-sampling formats. The Frame Sync frequency corresponds to the sampling frequncy divided by the samples/frame factor. Remote control command: OUTPut:FSYNc:FREQuency? BClk Freq Displays the bit clock frequency. Is calculated from the product of channel length * no of slots * sample freq / samples/frame. Value range: 6.75 kHz ... 55.296 MHz Remote control command: OUTPut:BCLk:FREQuency? Fsync Width Width of the FSYNC pulse 1 bit The FSYNC pulse is one data bit in length (BClk period) Remote control command: OUTPut:FWIDth ONEBit 1 slot The FSYNC pulse is the length of an audio channel (= slot length) Remote control command: OUTPut:FWIDth ONESlot 1146.2084.32 4.49 E-9 Configuring the USI Dual Channel Generator Square R&S UPV The FSYNC pulse has the shape of a symmetrical rectangle. If the number of the slot’s bit clock (BClk) cycles is odd the high phase is one cycle longer than the low phase (if Fsync slope = rising) Remote control command: OUTPut:FWIDth SQUare Value The length of the FSYNC pulse corresponds to the numeric value in data bits (BClk periods). Value range: 1 to (slot length*no of slots)-1 Remote control command: OUTPut:FWIDth VALue OUTPut:FWIDth:VALue Fsync Offset Determines the offset of the Fsync pulse relative to the reference point (start of the first slot) Value range: -slot length*(no of slots)...+slot length*(no of slots)-1 Remote control command: OUTPut:FOFFset Fsync Slope Polarity of the Fsync pulse Rising The Fsync pulse begins with a positive edge. Remote control command: OUTPut:FSLope RISing Falling The Fsync pulse begins with a negative edge. Remote control command: OUTPut:FSLope FALLing BClk Slope 1146.2084.32 Bit clock polarity (BClk) 4.50 E-9 R&S UPV Configuring the USI Dual Channel Generator Rising The TX_FSYNC_OUT, TX_SLCLK_OUT, TX_DATA1, TX_DATA2, TX_DATA3 and TX_DATA4 signals are sampled with a rising bit clock edge (relative to TX_BCLK_IN in slave mode or TX_BCLK_OUT in master operation and with internal synchronisation). In case of external synchronisation the TX_FSYNC_IN signal is always sampled with the reverse bit clock edge (TX_BCLK_IN). In this case with the falling edge of the external bit clock signal. Remote control command: OUTPut:BSLope RISing Falling The TX_FSYNC_OUT, TX_SLCLK_OUT, TX_DATA1, TX_DATA2, TX_DATA3 and TX_DATA4 signals are sampled with a falling bit clock edge (relative to TX_BCLK_IN in slave mode or TX_BCLK_OUT in master operation and with internal synchronisation). In case of external synchronisation, the TX_FSYNC_IN signal is always with the reverse bit clock edge (TX_BCLK_IN). In this case with the rising edge of the external bit clock signal. Remote control command: OUTPut:BSLope FALLing SlClk Width Slot clock pulse (SlClk) width 1 bit The SlClk pulse is one data bit in length (BClk period). Remote control command: OUTPut:SLCWidth ONEBit Square The SlClk pulse has the shape of a symmetrical rectangle. If the number of the slot’s bit clock (BClk) cycles is odd the high phase is one cycle longer than the low phase (with SlClk slope = rising). Remote control command: OUTPut:SLCWidth SQUare Value The length of the SlClk pulse corresponds to the numeric value in data bits (BClk periods). Value range: 1 to slot length -1 Remote control command: OUTPut:SLCWidth VALue OUTPut:SLCWidth:VALue 1146.2084.32 4.51 E-9 Configuring the USI Dual Channel Generator SlClk Offset R&S UPV Determines the slot clock (SlClk) offset relative to the start of the slot. Value range: -slot length ... + slot length-1 Remote control command: OUTPut:SLCOffset SlClk Slope Slot clock (SlClk) pulse polarity. Rising The SlClk pulse begins with a positive edge. Remote control command: OUTPut:SLCSlope RISing Falling The SlClk pulse begins with a negative edge. Remote control command: OUTPut:SLCSlope FALLing MClk Ratio Relationship between the master clock (MCLK) and the FrameSync (FSYNC). Value range: 16 to 768 MClk_Ratio * Sample_Freq <= 110,592 MHz Remote control command: OUTPut:MRATio BClk Jitt Freq The generator output signals (TX_BCLK_OUT, TX_FSYNC_OUT, TX_SLCLK_OUT, TX_DATA1 to 4) can be jittered sinusoidally. The jitter oscillator frequency is set with this parameter. Value range: 100 mHz to 110 MHz max (depending on the amplitude set). Remote control command: OUTPut:BCLock:JITFrequency 1146.2084.32 4.52 E-9 R&S UPV BClk Jitt Ampl Configuring the USI Dual Channel Generator The generator output signals (TX_BCLK_OUT, TX_FSYNC_OUT, TX_SLCLK_OUT, TX_DATA1 to 4) can be jittered sinusoidally. This parameter determines the jitter oscillator’s peak amplitude. Value range: 0 to 2.5 UI max (depending on the frequency set). One UI corresponds to the bit clock (BClk) cycle period. Remote control command: OUTPut:BCLock:JITAmplitude MClk Jitt Freq The TX_MCLK_OUT generator signal can be jittered sinusoidally. The jitter oscillator frequency is set with this parameter. Value range: 100 mHz to 110 MHz max (depending on the amplitude set). Remote control command: OUTPut:MCLock:JITFrequency MClk Jitt Ampl The TX_MCLK_OUT generator signal can be jittered sinusoidally. This parameter determines the jitter oscillator peak amplitude. Value range: 0 to 2.5 UI max (depending on the set freqeuency). One UI corresponds to the master clock (MCLK) cycle period. Remote control command: OUTPut:MCLock:JITAmplitude Logic Voltage Used to set the generator logic voltage. Changing the voltage level causes the probe to be reloaded. The probe can be attached and disconnected and put back into operation during operation with this mechanism. 0.9 Volt 0.9 volts CMOS logic voltage Remote control command: OUTPut:LOGVoltage MV0900 1146.2084.32 4.53 E-9 Configuring the USI Dual Channel Generator 1.2 Volt R&S UPV 1.2 volts CMOS logic voltage Remote control command: OUTPut:LOGVoltage MV1200 1.8 Volt 1.8 volts CMOS logic voltage Remote control command: OUTPut:LOGVoltage MV1800 2.5 Volt 2.5 volts CMOS logic voltage Remote control command: OUTPut:LOGVoltage MV2500 3.3 Volt 3.3 volts LVTTL logic cvoltage Remote control command: OUTPut:LOGVoltage MV3300 Coding Generator data coding regulation. A Law and Z Law quantification characteristics are available for telephony applications. None Generator data is analyzed linearly PCM coded. Remote control command: OUTPut:CODing NONE A-Law Generator data is quantified in accordance with A Law. Remote control command: OUTPut:CODing ALAW J-Law Generator data is quantified in accordance with Z Law. Remote control command: OUTPut:CODing ULAW Ref Voltage Reference value for the relative amplitude units. If this reference value is changed, all reference value-related amplitude settings are also changed. Remote control command: SOURce:VOLTage:REFerence 1146.2084.32 4.54 E-9 R&S UPV Ref Frequency Configuring the USI Dual Channel Generator Reference value for the relative frequency units. If the reference frequency is changed, all reference value-related frequency settings are also changed. Remote control command: SOURce:FREQuency:REFerence Resync Using this function triggers renewed synchronisation of the generator. If this is synchronised externally, this function must be called once after applying the external clock signal Remote control command: OUTPut:RESYnc ONCE 1146.2084.32 4.55 E-9 Configuring the USI Dual Channel Generator R&S UPV Meaning of the TX_DATA 1 to TX_DATA 4 setting line strings Setting strings for standard formats with one sample per frame: If the generator is configured with the following setting lines, each slot within a frame contains the same sample of the selected signal source. The exemplary format visualised below corresponds to current converter formats. In the TX_DATA1 to 4 setting lines the “Generator1”, “Generator2”, “Null” and “Tristate” signal sources can be separately assigned to the maximum 256 slots of any single data line. Syntax: